1 #LyX 2.2 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \default_output_format pdf2
74 \bibtex_command bibtex
75 \index_command default
79 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
80 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
84 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
85 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
86 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
91 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
92 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
95 \use_package amsmath 1
96 \use_package amssymb 1
99 \use_package mathdots 1
100 \use_package mathtools 0
101 \use_package mhchem 1
102 \use_package stackrel 0
103 \use_package stmaryrd 0
104 \use_package undertilde 0
106 \cite_engine_type default
110 \paperorientation portrait
114 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \paragraph_separation skip
133 \quotes_language english
136 \paperpagestyle default
137 \tracking_changes true
138 \output_changes false
142 \author 986154928 "Gnter Milde"
153 by the \SpecialChar LyX
158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
160 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
161 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
162 Documentation mailing list:
163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
165 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
176 \begin_inset Newline newline
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Note Note
187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
188 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
194 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
195 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
203 \begin_layout Standard
204 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
205 LatexCommand tableofcontents
212 \begin_layout Chapter
216 \begin_layout Section
217 What is \SpecialChar LyX
221 \begin_layout Standard
223 is a document preparation system.
224 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
225 scripts, publishable books, business
226 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
227 It is unlike most other
228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
235 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
237 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
246 \begin_inset Quotes eld
250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
253 pt type, left justified, 5
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
263 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
267 \begin_layout Standard
268 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
273 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
277 \begin_layout Standard
282 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
283 's philosophy: most importantly,
284 the format of all of the manuals.
285 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
286 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
292 manual describes that, too.
295 \begin_layout Section
300 \begin_layout Standard
301 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
302 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
304 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
305 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
309 \begin_layout Standard
310 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
311 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
312 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
314 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
315 only a vertical scrollbar.
316 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
317 The first case is large images.
318 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
319 image and use the option
330 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
333 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
334 this doesn't work for equations yet.
337 \begin_layout Standard
338 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
339 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
347 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
354 \begin_layout Section
358 \begin_layout Standard
359 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
361 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
363 Just select the manual you want to read from the
370 \begin_layout Section
371 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
373 \begin_inset CommandInset label
375 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
382 \begin_layout Standard
383 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
384 can be configured via the menu
386 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
390 \begin_inset Index idx
393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
400 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
402 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
403 packages are available.
404 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
406 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
408 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
413 \begin_inset space \space{}
416 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
417 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
419 To force \SpecialChar LyX
420 to re-inspect your system, you should use
422 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
426 \begin_inset Index idx
429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
430 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
436 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
437 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
440 \begin_layout Section
443 \begin_inset CommandInset label
445 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
452 \begin_layout Standard
453 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
454 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
455 installed, but you will not be
456 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
457 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
458 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
459 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
460 document can always be output as plain text
464 \begin_layout Standard
465 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
466 or DocBook classes or packages.
467 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
468 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
471 \begin_layout Standard
472 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
473 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
474 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
477 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
485 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
486 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
489 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
493 \begin_inset Index idx
496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
497 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
505 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 \begin_layout Chapter
517 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
521 \begin_layout Section
522 Basic File Operations
523 \begin_inset Index idx
526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
535 \begin_layout Standard
540 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
541 in addition to some more advanced operations:
544 \begin_layout Itemize
566 \begin_layout Itemize
582 arg "buffer-new-template"
588 \begin_layout Itemize
610 \begin_layout Itemize
620 \begin_layout Itemize
634 \begin_layout Itemize
656 \begin_layout Itemize
668 arg "buffer-write-as"
674 \begin_layout Itemize
688 \begin_layout Itemize
702 \begin_layout Standard
703 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
704 a few minor differences.
707 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
718 command lists the available templates.
719 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
720 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
721 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
729 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
736 \begin_layout Standard
737 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
750 \begin_inset Quotes erd
754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
762 \begin_inset Quotes eld
766 \begin_inset Quotes erd
769 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
770 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
771 is just that — a big, blank space.
779 \begin_layout Standard
800 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
805 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
808 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
826 will reload the document from disk.
827 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
828 and want to restore it to the last save.
837 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
838 them as your changes.
841 \begin_layout Section
842 Basic Editing Features
843 \begin_inset Index idx
846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
855 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
862 \begin_layout Standard
863 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
864 can perform cut and paste operations
865 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
866 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
867 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
868 editing features and how to access
870 We will start with cut and paste.
873 \begin_layout Standard
874 As you might expect, the
878 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
879 various other editing features.
880 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
884 \begin_layout Itemize
890 \begin_inset Index idx
893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
922 \begin_layout Itemize
928 \begin_inset Index idx
931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
960 \begin_layout Itemize
966 \begin_inset Index idx
969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
994 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_layout Itemize
1008 \begin_inset space ~
1014 \begin_layout Itemize
1018 \begin_inset space ~
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset Index idx
1031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1040 \begin_inset Index idx
1043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1058 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1068 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1074 \begin_layout Standard
1075 The first three are self-explanatory.
1076 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1077 and other programs by
1098 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1099 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1104 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1105 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1106 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1107 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1108 into individual cells.
1112 \begin_inset space ~
1117 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1118 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1122 \begin_layout Standard
1126 \begin_inset space ~
1131 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1133 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1135 \begin_inset space ~
1142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1148 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1149 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1150 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1152 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1156 \begin_inset space \space{}
1159 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1160 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1163 \begin_inset space ~
1166 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1168 \begin_inset space ~
1172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1176 \begin_inset space ~
1185 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1186 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1188 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1192 \begin_inset space ~
1197 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1198 start a new paragraph.
1199 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1200 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1205 \begin_inset space ~
1208 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1222 \begin_inset space ~
1225 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1228 paste from the primary selection.
1229 This is normally the currently selected text.
1232 \begin_layout Standard
1235 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1237 \begin_inset space ~
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1249 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1259 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1265 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1268 \begin_inset space ~
1277 \begin_inset space ~
1282 button to skip the current word.
1286 \begin_inset space ~
1291 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1300 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1302 If the toggle is set, searching for
1303 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1314 will not match the word
1315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1329 Match whole words only
1331 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1332 to only find complete words, e.
1333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1362 offers also an advanced
1365 \begin_inset space ~
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1374 feature that is described in section
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1381 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1388 \begin_layout Standard
1389 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1390 \begin_inset space \space{}
1394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1402 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1404 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1409 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1416 \begin_layout Standard
1420 arg "inset-select-all"
1423 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1424 When the cursor is inside an inset
1427 arg "inset-select-all"
1430 selects the content of the inset.
1434 arg "inset-select-all"
1437 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1442 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1445 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1449 \begin_layout Section
1451 \begin_inset Index idx
1454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1461 \begin_inset Index idx
1464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1473 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1480 \begin_layout Standard
1481 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1483 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1486 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1489 or the toolbar button
1495 to undo some mistake.
1496 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1498 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1501 or the toolbar button
1508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1515 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1516 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1519 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1522 \begin_layout Standard
1523 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1532 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1533 This is a consequence of the 100
1534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1537 step undo limit mentioned above.
1540 \begin_layout Standard
1549 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1551 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1555 \begin_layout Section
1557 \begin_inset Index idx
1560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1569 \begin_layout Standard
1570 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1573 \begin_layout Enumerate
1578 \begin_layout Itemize
1583 once anywhere in the edit window.
1584 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1588 \begin_layout Enumerate
1593 \begin_layout Itemize
1600 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1603 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1606 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1607 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1610 \begin_layout Itemize
1611 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1621 \begin_layout Enumerate
1622 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1626 \begin_layout Standard
1627 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1628 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1632 \begin_layout Section
1634 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1636 name "sec:Navigating"
1641 \begin_inset Index idx
1644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1653 \begin_layout Standard
1655 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1658 \begin_layout Itemize
1663 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1664 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1667 \begin_layout Itemize
1668 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1670 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1672 \begin_inset space ~
1677 or by the toolbar button
1680 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1686 \begin_layout Itemize
1687 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1689 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1692 and use the same menu to return to them.
1693 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1696 \begin_layout Standard
1700 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1705 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1706 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1708 \begin_inset space ~
1713 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1714 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1715 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1716 your last editing position.
1719 \begin_layout Standard
1724 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1728 \begin_layout Subsection
1730 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1732 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1737 \begin_inset Index idx
1740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1741 Navigating ! Outline
1747 \begin_inset Index idx
1750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1759 \begin_layout Standard
1760 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1761 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1762 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1764 \begin_inset space ~
1768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1770 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1774 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1775 \begin_inset space ~
1779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1781 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1786 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1792 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1793 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1794 dialog and to modify the citation.
1797 \begin_layout Standard
1798 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1800 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1801 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1809 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1812 \begin_layout Standard
1813 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1814 you further to control the display.
1819 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1820 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1826 option keeps it in the current view state.
1827 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1828 \begin_inset space ~
1831 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 3, the subsections of sections
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1844 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1849 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1859 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1862 \begin_layout Standard
1869 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1870 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1884 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1885 So, for example, you can move section
1886 \begin_inset space ~
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1893 2.4 or after section
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1899 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1912 (or the corresponding key bindings
1920 ) you can change the level of sections.
1921 So you can for example make section
1922 \begin_inset space ~
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1936 \begin_layout Subsection
1937 Horizontal Scrolling
1938 \begin_inset Index idx
1941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1942 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1950 \begin_layout Standard
1952 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1958 \begin_inset space \space{}
1962 \begin_inset space ~
1965 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1966 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1967 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1972 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1976 \begin_layout Itemize
1978 is used on a small tablet computer
1981 \begin_layout Itemize
1982 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1994 \begin_inset space ~
2007 \begin_layout Itemize
2008 Math constructs with long command names
2011 \begin_layout Standard
2012 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2013 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2015 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2016 windows so that table
2017 \begin_inset space ~
2021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2023 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2028 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2030 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2031 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2034 \begin_layout Standard
2035 \begin_inset Float table
2041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2042 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2045 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2047 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2051 Horizontal scrolling test.
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2061 \begin_inset Tabular
2062 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2063 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2064 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2108 \begin_layout Section
2109 Input/Word Completion
2110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2112 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2117 \begin_inset Index idx
2120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2127 \begin_inset Index idx
2130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2161 \begin_layout Standard
2163 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2165 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2166 is used to propose completions.
2169 \begin_layout Standard
2170 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2173 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2178 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2185 \begin_inset space ~
2189 \begin_inset space ~
2194 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2204 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2208 \begin_inset space ~
2214 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2215 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2216 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2217 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2220 \begin_layout Standard
2222 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2223 completions available.
2228 key to accept a proposed completion.
2229 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2230 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2231 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2239 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2240 ing options for text.
2241 The special math option
2245 enables characters to be composed.
2246 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2247 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2250 , you can then input the characters
2251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2259 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2262 to a formula to get it.
2263 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2264 of the math toolbar.
2265 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2269 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2270 's installation folder.
2271 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2280 \begin_layout Section
2282 \begin_inset Index idx
2285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2292 \begin_inset Index idx
2295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2324 \begin_inset Index idx
2327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2358 \begin_layout Standard
2359 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2373 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2376 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2380 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2381 \begin_inset space ~
2385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2387 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2394 \begin_layout Standard
2398 \begin_inset space ~
2406 \begin_inset space ~
2427 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2431 \begin_layout Labeling
2432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2436 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2437 LatexCommand nomenclature
2439 description "Tabulator key"
2445 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2447 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2448 \begin_inset space ~
2452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2454 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2459 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2461 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2465 , especially section
2466 \begin_inset space ~
2470 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2472 reference "subsec:Lists"
2478 If you are still confused, look in the
2483 \begin_inset Newline newline
2491 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2492 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2496 \begin_layout Labeling
2497 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2501 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2502 LatexCommand nomenclature
2504 description "Escape key"
2511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2518 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2519 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2522 \begin_layout Labeling
2523 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2529 \begin_inset space ~
2533 \begin_inset space ~
2540 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2541 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2545 \begin_layout Standard
2546 There are three modifier keys:
2549 \begin_layout Labeling
2550 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2568 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2569 LatexCommand nomenclature
2571 description "Control key"
2575 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2576 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2580 \begin_layout Itemize
2589 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2592 \begin_layout Itemize
2601 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2604 \begin_layout Itemize
2613 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2617 \begin_layout Labeling
2618 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2636 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2637 LatexCommand nomenclature
2639 description "Shift key"
2643 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2644 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2647 \begin_layout Labeling
2648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2666 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2667 LatexCommand nomenclature
2669 description "Alt or Meta key"
2673 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2674 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2675 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2681 \begin_inset Newline newline
2684 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2686 menu accelerator keys
2689 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2690 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2694 \begin_layout Standard
2695 For example, the sequence
2696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2702 \begin_inset space ~
2706 \begin_inset space ~
2712 \begin_inset space ~
2720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2739 \begin_inset space ~
2745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2755 \begin_layout Standard
2760 manual lists all other things bound to the
2768 \begin_layout Standard
2769 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2771 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2772 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2773 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2774 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2775 The \SpecialChar LyX
2776 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2777 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2778 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2780 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2796 followed by a capital
2803 \begin_layout Chapter
2806 \begin_inset Index idx
2809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2819 \begin_layout Section
2821 \begin_inset Index idx
2824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2833 \begin_layout Subsection
2837 \begin_layout Standard
2838 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2839 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2840 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2841 numbering schemes, and so on.
2842 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2843 and format the title of your document differently.
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2851 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2852 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2853 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2854 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2855 picks one for you by default.
2856 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2859 \begin_layout Subsection
2861 \begin_inset Index idx
2864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2871 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2873 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2880 \begin_layout Standard
2881 You can select a class using the
2883 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2884 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2888 \begin_inset Index idx
2891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2898 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2902 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2906 \begin_layout Standard
2907 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2912 \begin_layout Description
2913 Article for basic articles
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Report for basic reports
2920 \begin_layout Description
2921 Book for writing a book
2924 \begin_layout Description
2925 Letter for US-style letters
2928 \begin_layout Standard
2929 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2930 only uses if you have installed
2931 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2932 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2933 distributions will include
2935 Here are some of the classes.
2936 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2938 Special Document Classes
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2951 \begin_layout Description
2952 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2961 \begin_layout Description
2962 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2963 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2964 There are three article layouts available.
2965 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2966 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2967 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2968 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2973 sequential numbering
2974 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2977 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2978 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2979 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2980 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2983 \begin_layout Description
2984 Beamer Layout for presentations
2987 \begin_layout Description
2988 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2989 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2990 document class, but a new one that is distributed
2991 with \SpecialChar LyX
2995 \begin_layout Description
2996 Chess Layout to write about chess games
2999 \begin_layout Description
3001 \begin_inset space ~
3004 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3007 \begin_layout Description
3008 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3011 \begin_layout Description
3012 Foils Used to make transparencies
3015 \begin_layout Description
3016 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3017 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3018 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3019 with \SpecialChar LyX
3023 \begin_layout Description
3024 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3025 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3028 \begin_layout Description
3029 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3036 \begin_layout Description
3037 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3038 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3039 (Is used by this document.)
3042 \begin_layout Description
3043 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3050 \begin_layout Description
3055 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3056 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3058 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3062 \begin_layout Description
3063 Slides Used to make transparencies
3066 \begin_layout Description
3068 \begin_inset space ~
3071 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3072 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3075 \begin_layout Description
3076 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3079 \begin_layout Standard
3080 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3082 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3084 Special Document Classes
3091 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3092 of the document classes.
3095 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3099 \begin_layout Standard
3100 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3102 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3103 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3105 \begin_inset Index idx
3108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3125 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3126 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3128 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3131 \begin_layout Standard
3134 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3139 , are highly specialized.
3141 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3142 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3143 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3144 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3145 by some document class.
3146 There are just too many of them.
3147 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3150 \begin_layout Standard
3151 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3159 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3160 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3161 document class for a new file.
3163 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3166 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3173 manual for information on how to install them.
3174 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3180 \begin_layout Standard
3181 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3182 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3183 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3184 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3185 class files to be used for dissertation
3186 s submitted to those universities.
3187 The \SpecialChar LyX
3188 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3190 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3194 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3200 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3207 name "subsec:Modules"
3212 \begin_inset Index idx
3215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3224 \begin_layout Standard
3225 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3226 chosen document class.
3227 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3228 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3239 \begin_inset Index idx
3242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3249 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3253 \begin_layout Standard
3254 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3255 packages or file format converters that are not always
3256 installed by default.
3258 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3259 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3260 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3261 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3263 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 file without the missing prerequisites.
3265 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3266 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3273 \begin_inset Index idx
3276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3277 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3283 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3288 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3291 \begin_layout Standard
3292 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3302 will advise you about these things.
3310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3312 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3314 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3319 \begin_inset Index idx
3322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Document ! Local Layout
3331 \begin_layout Standard
3332 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3333 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3334 : They are intended to be used in
3335 a variety of different documents.
3336 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3337 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3338 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3339 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3340 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3342 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3360 manual for information on how to use it.
3363 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3367 \begin_layout Standard
3368 Each class has a default set of options.
3369 Here's a quick table describing them:
3372 \begin_layout Standard
3373 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3379 \begin_layout Standard
3381 \begin_inset Tabular
3382 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3383 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3384 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3385 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3386 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3387 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3388 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3635 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3746 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3842 \begin_layout Standard
3843 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3849 \begin_layout Standard
3850 You're probably also wondering what
3851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3855 \begin_inset space ~
3859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3863 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3864 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3869 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3874 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3884 headings, there are also
3892 headings, and so on.
3893 We will describe these headings fully in section
3894 \begin_inset space ~
3898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3900 reference "subsec:Headings"
3907 \begin_layout Subsection
3909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3911 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3916 \begin_inset Index idx
3919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3926 \begin_inset Index idx
3929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3938 \begin_layout Standard
3939 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3948 \begin_inset space ~
3956 \begin_inset space ~
3961 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3963 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3964 doesn't support special options you want to
3965 use for your document.
3966 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3967 -class and its options, you have to read
3971 \begin_layout Standard
3975 \begin_inset space ~
3982 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3988 \begin_inset space ~
3993 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3994 You can choose between the following five options:
3997 \begin_layout Labeling
3998 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4003 Use default page style of current class.
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 No page numbers or headings.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4030 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4031 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4032 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4033 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4036 \begin_layout Labeling
4037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4042 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4043 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4049 \begin_inset Index idx
4052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4054 -packages ! fancyhdr
4060 How they are defined is explained in section
4061 \begin_inset space ~
4065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4067 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4074 \begin_layout Standard
4075 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4076 \begin_inset space ~
4080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4082 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4089 \begin_layout Subsection
4090 Paper Size and Orientation
4091 \begin_inset Index idx
4094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4095 Document ! Paper size
4101 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4103 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4110 \begin_layout Standard
4111 You can find the following options in the menu
4114 \begin_inset space ~
4121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4125 \begin_inset Index idx
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4137 \begin_layout Labeling
4138 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4142 \begin_inset space ~
4147 What size paper to print on.
4152 \begin_layout Itemize
4158 \begin_layout Itemize
4164 \begin_layout Itemize
4170 \begin_layout Itemize
4176 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 US letter, US legal, US executive
4182 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 \begin_layout Itemize
4195 \begin_layout Labeling
4196 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4201 To choose whether to output as
4212 \begin_layout Labeling
4213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4217 \begin_inset space ~
4222 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4223 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4226 \begin_layout Subsection
4228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4230 name "subsec:Margins"
4235 \begin_inset Index idx
4238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4245 \begin_inset Index idx
4248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4257 \begin_layout Standard
4258 Paper margins are set in the menu
4260 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4264 \begin_inset Index idx
4267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4276 \begin_layout Standard
4277 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4278 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4279 the paper format and the font size into account.
4282 \begin_layout Subsection
4286 \begin_layout Standard
4287 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4293 That includes the paragraph environments.
4294 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4295 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4296 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4298 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4307 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4309 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4310 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4311 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4314 \begin_layout Section
4315 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4316 \begin_inset Index idx
4319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4320 Paragraph ! Indentation
4328 \begin_layout Subsection
4330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4332 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4339 \begin_layout Standard
4340 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4341 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4344 \begin_layout Standard
4345 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4346 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4347 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4348 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4352 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4358 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4359 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4360 language than English.
4362 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4365 \begin_layout Standard
4366 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4367 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4368 into \SpecialChar LyX
4370 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4373 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4375 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4376 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4377 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4384 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4385 goes to produce a printable file.
4390 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4392 gives you the ability globally to change
4396 these pre-coded spacings.
4397 We will explain more later.
4400 \begin_layout Subsection
4401 Paragraph Separation
4402 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4404 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4409 \begin_inset Index idx
4412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4413 Paragraph ! Separation
4421 \begin_layout Standard
4429 \begin_inset space ~
4437 \begin_inset space ~
4444 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4448 \begin_inset Index idx
4451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4457 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4460 \begin_layout Subsection
4464 \begin_layout Standard
4465 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4468 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4470 \begin_inset space ~
4475 dialog and toggle the
4478 \begin_inset space ~
4483 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4486 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4490 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4491 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4495 \begin_layout Standard
4496 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4497 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4500 \begin_layout Subsection
4502 \begin_inset Index idx
4505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4506 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4514 \begin_layout Standard
4517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4521 \begin_inset Index idx
4524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4533 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4537 \begin_inset space ~
4546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4547 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4553 \begin_inset Index idx
4556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4558 -packages ! setspace
4563 installed to use this feature.
4568 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4570 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4572 \begin_inset space ~
4577 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4578 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4581 \begin_layout Section
4582 Paragraph Environments
4583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4585 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4590 \begin_inset Index idx
4593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4594 Paragraph ! Environments
4600 \begin_inset Index idx
4603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4604 Paragraph environments|(
4612 \begin_layout Subsection
4616 \begin_layout Standard
4617 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4620 \begin_layout Standard
4629 } \SpecialChar ldots
4639 \begin_inset Newline newline
4642 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4644 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4645 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4646 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4655 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4658 \begin_layout Standard
4659 A paragraph environment is simply a
4660 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4667 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4668 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4669 scheme, labels, and so on.
4670 Additionally, you can
4671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4678 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4679 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4680 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4681 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4683 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4685 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4688 \begin_layout Standard
4689 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4690 \begin_inset Graphics
4691 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4697 at the left end of the toolbar.
4699 will change the environment of the
4703 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4704 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4705 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4709 \begin_layout Standard
4718 create a new paragraph using the
4722 paragraph environment.
4724 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4728 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4731 because if you are in one of these environments:
4734 \begin_layout Itemize
4740 \begin_layout Itemize
4746 \begin_layout Itemize
4752 \begin_layout Itemize
4758 \begin_layout Itemize
4764 \begin_layout Itemize
4770 \begin_layout Itemize
4776 \begin_layout Standard
4778 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4782 , rather than resetting it to
4787 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4788 \begin_inset space ~
4792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4794 reference "sec:Nesting"
4801 \begin_layout Subsection
4805 \begin_layout Standard
4806 The default paragraph environment is
4811 It creates a plain paragraph.
4813 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4814 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4815 this manual) are in the
4822 \begin_layout Standard
4823 You can nest a paragraph using the
4827 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4835 \begin_layout Subsection
4837 \begin_inset Index idx
4840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4849 \begin_layout Standard
4850 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4851 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4860 for thanks or contact information.
4861 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4862 places all of this on a separate page
4863 along with today's date.
4864 For other types of documents, the title
4865 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4872 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4876 \begin_layout Standard
4878 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4892 Here's how you use them:
4895 \begin_layout Itemize
4896 Put the title of your document in the
4903 \begin_layout Itemize
4904 Put the author name in the
4911 \begin_layout Itemize
4912 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4913 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4919 Note that using this environment is optional.
4920 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4921 will automatically insert today's date.
4922 If you don't want a date, use the option
4924 Suppress default date on front page
4928 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4929 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4931 \begin_inset space ~
4939 \begin_layout Standard
4940 You can use footnotes to insert
4941 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4948 or contact information.
4951 \begin_layout Subsection
4953 \begin_inset Index idx
4956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4965 name "subsec:Headings"
4972 \begin_layout Standard
4973 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4975 takes care of the numbering for you.
4978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4980 \begin_inset Index idx
4983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4984 Section headings ! Numbered
4992 \begin_layout Standard
4993 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
4997 \begin_layout Enumerate
5003 \begin_layout Enumerate
5009 \begin_layout Enumerate
5015 \begin_layout Enumerate
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Standard
5041 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5042 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5043 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5046 \begin_layout Standard
5047 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5048 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5049 You group the book into chapters.
5051 does a similar grouping:
5054 \begin_layout Itemize
5059 is divided into either
5070 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 \begin_layout Itemize
5094 \begin_layout Itemize
5106 \begin_layout Itemize
5118 \begin_layout Itemize
5130 \begin_layout Standard
5131 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5139 Not all document types use the
5143 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5148 is the top-level heading.
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5161 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5162 labels it with its number,
5163 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5165 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5167 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5171 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5177 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5179 \begin_inset Index idx
5182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5183 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5191 \begin_layout Standard
5192 The unnumbered section headings have a
5193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 at the end of their name.
5201 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5202 the table of contents, see section
5203 \begin_inset space ~
5207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5216 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5217 Changing the Numbering
5218 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5220 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5227 \begin_layout Standard
5228 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5229 in the Table of Contents.
5230 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5232 Just as certain classes start with
5246 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5256 This is something you can change.
5259 \begin_layout Standard
5262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5266 \begin_inset Index idx
5269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5278 \begin_inset space ~
5282 \begin_inset space ~
5287 you will see two counters.
5292 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5293 numbers a section heading.
5294 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5298 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5299 Short Titles of Headings
5300 \begin_inset Index idx
5303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5304 Section headings ! Short titles
5310 \begin_inset Argument 1
5313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5322 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5329 \begin_layout Standard
5330 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5331 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5332 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5333 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5336 \begin_layout Standard
5338 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5339 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5340 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5341 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5344 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5346 \begin_inset space ~
5352 This will insert a box labeled
5353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5357 \begin_inset space ~
5361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5364 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5365 This also works for captions inside floats.
5366 There can only be one short title per title.
5369 \begin_layout Standard
5370 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5377 \begin_layout Standard
5378 The following information applies to all section headings:
5381 \begin_layout Itemize
5382 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5385 \begin_layout Itemize
5386 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5389 \begin_layout Itemize
5390 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5393 \begin_layout Itemize
5394 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5397 \begin_layout Subsection
5401 \begin_layout Standard
5403 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5417 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5418 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5419 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5420 the text they contain.
5421 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5429 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5432 \begin_layout Standard
5433 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5442 when you start a new paragraph.
5443 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5447 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5448 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5449 have to change back to the
5453 environment yourself.
5456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5458 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5465 \begin_inset Index idx
5468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5477 \begin_layout Standard
5478 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5479 time for the differences.
5488 are identical except for one difference:
5492 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5501 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5504 \begin_layout Standard
5505 Here's an example of the
5518 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5520 See – no indentation!
5524 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5525 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5526 the other paragraph.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5530 Here's another example, this time in the
5537 \begin_layout Quotation
5543 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5544 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5545 the first line, then
5549 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5553 you were quoting other text.
5556 \begin_layout Quotation
5557 Here's a new paragraph.
5558 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5559 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5562 \begin_layout Standard
5563 As the examples show,
5567 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5568 They should put quotes in the
5573 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5577 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5580 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5582 \begin_inset Index idx
5585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5592 \begin_inset Index idx
5595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5611 \begin_layout Standard
5616 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5622 \begin_inset Newline newline
5625 Which I did not rehearse!
5629 It could be much worse.
5630 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5632 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5633 indented a bit more than the first.
5634 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5640 \begin_inset Newline newline
5643 And make things look fine
5644 \begin_inset Newline newline
5650 arg "newline-insert newline"
5656 \begin_layout Standard
5661 does not indent both margins.
5662 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5663 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5666 arg "newline-insert newline"
5672 \begin_layout Subsection
5674 \begin_inset Index idx
5677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5693 \begin_layout Standard
5695 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5705 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5706 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5715 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5716 lets you provide your own label.
5717 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5718 describing some general features of all four of them.
5721 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5725 \begin_layout Standard
5726 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5728 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5738 reset the environment to
5742 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5743 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5744 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5748 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5752 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5759 \begin_layout Standard
5760 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5761 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5762 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5764 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5765 you read all of section
5766 \begin_inset space ~
5770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5772 reference "sec:Nesting"
5779 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5781 \begin_inset Index idx
5784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5800 \begin_layout Standard
5801 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5805 paragraph environment.
5806 It has the following properties:
5809 \begin_layout Itemize
5810 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5814 \begin_layout Itemize
5816 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5819 \begin_layout Itemize
5820 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5824 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 The items can have any length.
5827 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5828 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5840 environment inside another
5844 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5848 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5852 \begin_layout Itemize
5854 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5859 \begin_inset space ~
5863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5865 reference "sec:Nesting"
5869 for a full explanation of nesting.
5873 \begin_layout Standard
5874 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5883 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5886 \begin_layout Standard
5887 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5888 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5891 \begin_layout Itemize
5892 The label for the first level
5896 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the second level is a dash.
5905 \begin_layout Itemize
5906 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5910 \begin_layout Itemize
5911 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5915 \begin_layout Itemize
5916 Back out to the third level.
5920 \begin_layout Itemize
5921 Back to the second level.
5925 \begin_layout Itemize
5926 Back to the outermost level.
5929 \begin_layout Standard
5930 These are the default labels for an
5935 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5940 dialog in the submenu
5945 \begin_inset Index idx
5948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5954 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5958 \begin_layout Standard
5959 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5960 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5962 \begin_inset space ~
5966 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5968 reference "sec:Nesting"
5975 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5977 \begin_inset Index idx
5980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5987 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5989 name "sec:Enumerate"
5996 \begin_layout Standard
6001 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6002 It has these properties:
6005 \begin_layout Enumerate
6006 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6010 \begin_layout Enumerate
6011 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6015 \begin_layout Enumerate
6017 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6020 \begin_layout Enumerate
6025 environment resets the counter to one.
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6042 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6043 Items can have any length.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6047 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6055 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6059 \begin_layout Standard
6068 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6070 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6071 labels the four different levels in an
6078 \begin_layout Enumerate
6079 The first level of an
6083 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6092 \begin_layout Enumerate
6093 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6097 \begin_layout Enumerate
6098 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6107 \begin_layout Enumerate
6108 Back to the third level
6112 \begin_layout Enumerate
6113 Back to the second level.
6117 \begin_layout Enumerate
6118 Back to the outermost level.
6121 \begin_layout Standard
6122 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6126 environment, see section
6127 \begin_inset space ~
6131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6133 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6138 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6142 \begin_layout Standard
6143 There is more to nesting
6147 environments than we've stated here.
6148 You should read section
6149 \begin_inset space ~
6153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6155 reference "sec:Nesting"
6159 to learn more about nesting.
6162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6164 \begin_inset Index idx
6167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6176 \begin_layout Standard
6177 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6181 list has no fixed label.
6182 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6191 of the first line as the label.
6195 \begin_layout Description
6196 Example: This is an example of the
6203 \begin_layout Standard
6205 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6209 \begin_layout Standard
6211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6218 it is meant that the first usage of the
6222 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6224 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6232 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6238 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6240 \begin_inset space ~
6246 \begin_inset space ~
6250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6252 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6256 for more information.) Here is an example:
6259 \begin_layout Description
6261 \begin_inset space ~
6264 Example: This one shows how to use a
6267 \begin_inset space ~
6279 \begin_layout Description
6280 Usage: You should use the
6284 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6285 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6287 It's not a good idea to use a
6291 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6292 You're better off using
6304 paragraphs into them.
6307 \begin_layout Description
6308 Nesting: You can nest
6312 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6316 \begin_layout Standard
6317 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6318 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6319 them from the first line.
6322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6324 \begin_inset Index idx
6327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6336 \begin_layout Standard
6341 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6342 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6346 \begin_layout Standard
6355 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6357 Here are its properties:
6360 \begin_layout Labeling
6361 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6363 \begin_inset space ~
6366 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6375 of each line as the item label.
6380 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6381 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6382 space as described above.
6385 \begin_layout Labeling
6386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6387 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6388 uses different margins for the item label and the
6389 body of the item text.
6390 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6391 label width plus a little extra space.
6395 \begin_layout Labeling
6396 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6398 \begin_inset space ~
6401 width \SpecialChar LyX
6402 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6403 If the label width is larger, the label
6404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6411 into the first line.
6412 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6413 margin of the rest of the item text.
6416 \begin_layout Labeling
6417 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6419 \begin_inset space ~
6422 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6427 environment has the same left margin.
6428 \begin_inset Newline newline
6431 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6434 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6436 \begin_inset space ~
6441 dialog (toolbar button
6444 arg "layout-paragraph"
6451 \begin_inset space ~
6456 determines the default label width.
6457 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6466 multiple times instead.
6467 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6477 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6480 \begin_inset space ~
6485 every time you alter a label in a
6490 \begin_inset Newline newline
6493 The predefined default width is the length of
6494 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6502 \begin_inset space ~
6508 \begin_layout Standard
6513 list the same way as the
6517 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6523 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6527 \begin_layout Standard
6532 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6533 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6535 \begin_inset space ~
6539 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6541 reference "sec:Nesting"
6545 to learn about nesting.
6548 \begin_layout Standard
6549 There is yet another feature of the
6553 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6554 left-justifies the item labels by
6556 You can use additional
6560 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6561 justifies the item label.
6566 are documented in section
6567 \begin_inset space ~
6571 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6573 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6578 Here are some examples:
6581 \begin_layout Labeling
6582 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6583 Left The default for
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6599 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6602 \begin_layout Labeling
6603 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6604 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6615 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6618 \begin_layout Subsection
6620 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6622 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6627 \begin_inset Index idx
6630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6639 \begin_layout Standard
6640 The features described in this section require that the module
6642 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6644 is loaded in the document settings.
6645 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6651 \begin_inset Index idx
6654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6656 -packages ! enumitem
6664 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6665 Custom Enumerate Lists
6666 \begin_inset Index idx
6669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6670 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6678 \begin_layout Standard
6680 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6686 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6687 There you add the command
6690 \begin_layout Standard
6698 \begin_layout Standard
6710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6711 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6712 Code, look at section
6713 \begin_inset space ~
6717 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6719 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6732 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6739 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6740 For capital Roman numerals replace
6752 in the command above.
6753 For Arabic numerals use
6761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6768 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6783 \begin_layout Standard
6785 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6793 You can only number 26
6794 \begin_inset space ~
6797 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6805 \begin_layout Standard
6806 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6807 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6810 \begin_layout Standard
6811 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6814 \begin_layout Enumerate
6815 \begin_inset Argument 1
6818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6844 \begin_layout Enumerate
6845 \begin_inset Argument 1
6848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6871 \begin_layout Enumerate
6876 \begin_layout Enumerate
6877 \begin_inset Argument 1
6880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6904 \begin_layout Enumerate
6905 \begin_inset Argument 1
6908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6934 \begin_layout Standard
6935 For this list these commands were used:
6938 \begin_layout Standard
6949 \begin_inset Newline newline
6957 \begin_inset Newline newline
6965 \begin_inset Newline newline
6975 \begin_layout Standard
6982 makes the label emphasized and
6991 \begin_layout Standard
6992 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7000 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7001 lists until you change the definition.
7009 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7011 \begin_inset Index idx
7014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7015 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7023 \begin_layout Standard
7024 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7027 \begin_layout Enumerate
7028 \begin_inset Argument 1
7031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7050 \begin_inset Note Note
7053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7054 goes back to default numbering
7062 \begin_layout Enumerate
7066 \begin_layout Standard
7070 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7074 \begin_layout Standard
7075 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7080 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7081 to indicate that it is a resumed
7082 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7083 , but in the output.
7086 \begin_layout Standard
7087 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7095 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7105 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7107 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7108 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7109 of a normal enumeration.
7110 There, insert the command
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7119 \begin_layout Standard
7124 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7128 \begin_layout Enumerate
7132 \begin_layout Enumerate
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7137 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7140 \begin_layout Enumerate
7141 \begin_inset Argument 1
7144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7160 This enumeration starts at 4
7163 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7165 \begin_inset Index idx
7168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7177 \begin_layout Standard
7178 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7180 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7183 \begin_layout Itemize
7187 \begin_layout Itemize
7188 with standard spacing
7191 \begin_layout Standard
7192 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7194 Add there the command
7198 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7201 \begin_layout Itemize
7202 \begin_inset Argument 1
7205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7228 \begin_layout Itemize
7232 \begin_layout Standard
7233 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7240 \begin_inset Index idx
7243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7245 -packages ! enumitem
7251 For more information see its documentation,
7252 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7261 \begin_layout Standard
7262 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7264 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7265 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7269 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7272 \begin_layout Enumerate
7273 \begin_inset Argument 1
7276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7284 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7297 \begin_layout Enumerate
7298 with negative indentation
7301 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7302 Further Customization
7303 \begin_inset Index idx
7306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 Lists ! Customization
7315 \begin_layout Standard
7316 You can also change the style of description lists.
7320 \begin_layout Standard
7326 \begin_layout Standard
7327 changes the description label font, the command
7330 \begin_layout Standard
7336 \begin_layout Standard
7337 sets the list style.
7340 \begin_layout Standard
7341 An example where the command
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7349 itshape, style=nextline
7352 \begin_layout Standard
7356 \begin_layout Description
7358 \begin_inset space ~
7362 \begin_inset Argument 1
7365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7371 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7383 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7384 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7388 \begin_layout Description
7390 \begin_inset space ~
7393 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7394 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7395 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7398 \begin_layout Standard
7399 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7405 \begin_inset Index idx
7408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7410 -packages ! enumitem
7416 For more information see its documentation
7417 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7426 \begin_layout Subsection
7428 \begin_inset Index idx
7431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7442 \begin_inset space ~
7445 Address: An Overview
7448 \begin_layout Standard
7449 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7450 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7458 \begin_inset space ~
7464 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7465 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7466 gags on the document.
7467 In contrast, you can use the
7474 \begin_inset space ~
7479 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7480 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7484 \begin_layout Standard
7485 Of course, you're not limited to using
7492 \begin_inset space ~
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7506 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7507 some European academic papers.
7510 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7514 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7521 \begin_layout Standard
7526 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7527 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7531 \begin_inset space ~
7536 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7537 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7538 Here's an example of each:
7541 \begin_layout Right Address
7543 \begin_inset Newline newline
7547 \begin_inset Newline newline
7551 \begin_inset Newline newline
7554 When is it? What is today?
7557 \begin_layout Standard
7561 \begin_inset space ~
7567 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7569 the largest block of text on a single line.
7570 Here's an example of the
7577 \begin_layout Address
7579 \begin_inset Newline newline
7582 Where do I send this
7583 \begin_inset Newline newline
7586 Your post office and country
7589 \begin_layout Standard
7590 As you can see, both
7597 \begin_inset space ~
7602 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7607 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7608 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7614 This makes sense, since
7622 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7623 Thus, you have to use
7630 arg "newline-insert newline"
7635 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7636 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7638 \begin_inset space ~
7642 \begin_inset space ~
7647 ) to start a new line in an
7654 \begin_inset space ~
7662 \begin_layout Subsection
7666 \begin_layout Standard
7667 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7668 or list of references.
7670 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7675 \begin_inset Index idx
7678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7687 \begin_layout Standard
7692 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7693 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7694 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7695 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7709 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7710 The book document classes ignores the
7714 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7718 in a letter document class.
7721 \begin_layout Standard
7726 environment does several things for you.
7727 First, it puts the centered label
7728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7736 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7738 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7739 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7740 the subsequent text.
7741 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7743 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7747 \begin_layout Standard
7748 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7752 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7753 The new paragraph will still be in the
7758 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7759 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7762 \begin_layout Standard
7763 \begin_inset Float figure
7768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7770 \begin_inset Graphics
7771 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7779 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7782 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7784 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7805 \begin_layout Standard
7806 We would love to demonstrate the
7810 environment, but since this document is in the
7811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7818 class, we can't do this.
7819 We inserted it therefore as figure
7820 \begin_inset space ~
7824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7826 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7831 If you have never heard of an
7832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7839 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7844 \begin_inset Index idx
7847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7854 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7856 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7863 \begin_layout Standard
7868 environment is used to list references.
7869 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7870 only use it at the end of the document.
7882 \begin_layout Standard
7883 When you first open a
7887 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7888 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7904 depending on the document class.
7905 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7906 Each paragraph of the
7910 environment is a bibliography entry.
7915 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7916 Each new paragraph is still in the
7923 \begin_layout Standard
7924 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7925 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7927 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7929 handling, have a look at section
7930 \begin_inset space ~
7934 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7936 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7943 \begin_layout Subsection
7944 Special Environments
7947 \begin_layout Standard
7949 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7950 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7953 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7958 \begin_inset Index idx
7961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7971 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7978 \begin_layout Standard
7984 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7986 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
7991 key as a fixed whitespace.
7995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8008 \begin_inset space ~
8013 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8031 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8034 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8037 arg "newline-insert newline"
8054 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8055 So, when you finish using the
8060 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8061 Also, you can nest the
8066 environment inside of others.
8069 \begin_layout Standard
8070 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8073 \begin_layout Itemize
8077 arg "newline-insert newline"
8080 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8081 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8085 \begin_inset space \space{}
8095 arg "newline-insert newline"
8101 \begin_layout Itemize
8105 arg "newline-insert newline"
8115 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8121 \begin_layout Itemize
8122 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8123 You must put at least one
8127 in any line you want blank.
8128 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8132 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8137 since that will insert
8142 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8145 arg "self-insert \""
8151 \begin_layout Standard
8155 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8159 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8163 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8167 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8171 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8172 printf("Hello World!
8177 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8181 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8185 \begin_layout Standard
8186 This is just the standard
8187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8198 \begin_layout Standard
8204 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8206 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8207 as if you used a typewriter.
8208 \begin_inset Index idx
8211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8212 Paragraph environments|)
8217 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8220 Program Code Listings
8225 \begin_inset space ~
8233 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8237 \begin_inset Index idx
8240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8249 \begin_layout Standard
8254 environment is similar to the
8259 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8260 computer console text.
8265 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8279 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8280 you can have empty lines.
8293 \begin_layout Itemize
8294 have a certain language and a text style
8297 \begin_layout Itemize
8298 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8299 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8300 and \SpecialChar TeX
8304 \begin_layout Standard
8305 Because of these properties
8309 works like a typewriter.
8313 \begin_layout Verbatim
8317 \begin_layout Verbatim
8320 The following 2 lines are empty:
8323 \begin_layout Verbatim
8327 \begin_layout Verbatim
8331 \begin_layout Verbatim
8332 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8337 \begin_layout Standard
8342 environment is identical to
8346 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8347 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8354 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8358 \begin_layout Section
8359 Nesting Environments
8360 \begin_inset Index idx
8363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8364 Nesting ! Environments
8370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8379 \begin_layout Subsection
8383 \begin_layout Standard
8385 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8387 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8389 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8391 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8403 \begin_layout Enumerate
8407 \begin_layout Enumerate
8412 \begin_layout Enumerate
8416 \begin_layout Enumerate
8421 \begin_layout Enumerate
8425 \begin_layout Standard
8426 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8427 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8429 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8431 \begin_inset space ~
8435 \begin_inset space ~
8443 \begin_inset space ~
8447 \begin_inset space ~
8452 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8454 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8457 arg "depth-increment"
8463 arg "depth-decrement"
8477 arg "depth-increment"
8483 arg "depth-decrement"
8487 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8488 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8492 \begin_layout Standard
8493 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8494 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8495 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8496 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8497 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8500 \begin_layout Standard
8501 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8503 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8505 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8508 \begin_layout Subsection
8509 What You Can and Can't Nest
8512 \begin_layout Standard
8513 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8514 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8519 than a simple yes or no.
8520 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8523 \begin_layout Itemize
8524 Completely unnestable
8527 \begin_layout Itemize
8528 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8532 \begin_layout Itemize
8533 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8539 environments have them:
8542 \begin_layout Description
8543 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8544 Can't nest into them.
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8554 \begin_layout Itemize
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8566 \begin_layout Itemize
8572 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Description
8581 \begin_inset space ~
8584 Nestable You can nest them.
8585 You can nest other things into them.
8589 \begin_layout Itemize
8595 \begin_layout Itemize
8601 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Itemize
8613 \begin_layout Itemize
8619 \begin_layout Itemize
8625 \begin_layout Itemize
8631 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8651 \begin_layout Description
8652 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8653 You can't nest anything into them.
8657 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8675 \begin_layout Itemize
8681 \begin_layout Itemize
8687 \begin_layout Itemize
8693 \begin_layout Itemize
8699 \begin_layout Itemize
8705 \begin_layout Itemize
8711 \begin_layout Itemize
8717 \begin_layout Itemize
8723 \begin_layout Itemize
8729 \begin_layout Itemize
8735 \begin_layout Itemize
8739 \begin_inset space ~
8745 \begin_layout Itemize
8752 \begin_layout Standard
8753 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8761 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8771 \begin_inset space ~
8774 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8775 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8776 nested section headings violate this.
8784 \begin_layout Subsection
8785 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8786 \begin_inset Index idx
8789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8790 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8798 \begin_layout Standard
8799 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8800 affected by nesting anyhow.
8804 \begin_layout Itemize
8808 \begin_layout Itemize
8812 \begin_layout Itemize
8816 \begin_layout Standard
8818 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8826 Figures and tables in
8830 are not affected by this.
8835 Have a look at section
8836 \begin_inset space ~
8840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8842 reference "sec:Floats"
8846 for more information about
8853 \begin_layout Standard
8855 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8856 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8860 \begin_layout Standard
8861 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8869 of its own, it behaves just like a
8870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8877 paragraph environment.
8878 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8882 \begin_layout Standard
8883 Here's an example with a table:
8886 \begin_layout Enumerate
8891 \begin_layout Enumerate
8892 This is (a) and it's nested.
8896 \begin_layout Standard
8897 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8903 \begin_layout Standard
8905 \begin_inset Tabular
8906 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8907 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8908 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8909 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8993 \begin_layout Standard
8994 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9001 \begin_layout Enumerate
9003 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9007 \begin_layout Enumerate
9011 \begin_layout Standard
9012 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9015 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 \begin_layout Enumerate
9021 This is (a) and it's nested.
9025 \begin_layout Standard
9026 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9032 \begin_layout Standard
9034 \begin_inset Tabular
9035 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9036 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9122 \begin_layout Standard
9123 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9129 \begin_layout Enumerate
9136 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9139 \begin_layout Enumerate
9143 \begin_layout Standard
9144 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9148 \begin_layout Standard
9149 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9152 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9155 \begin_layout Enumerate
9160 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 This is (a) and it's nested.
9164 \begin_layout Standard
9165 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9171 \begin_layout Standard
9173 \begin_inset Tabular
9174 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9175 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9176 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9177 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9262 \begin_layout Standard
9263 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9269 \begin_layout Enumerate
9271 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9278 \begin_layout Enumerate
9282 \begin_layout Standard
9283 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9289 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9290 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9294 \begin_layout Subsection
9295 Usage and General Features
9298 \begin_layout Standard
9299 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9300 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9309 is the innermost possible depth.
9310 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9313 \begin_layout Enumerate
9314 level #1 – outermost
9318 \begin_layout Enumerate
9323 \begin_layout Enumerate
9328 \begin_layout Enumerate
9333 \begin_layout Itemize
9338 \begin_layout Itemize
9347 \begin_layout Standard
9348 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9349 both of them in the example.
9350 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9360 For example, if we tried to nest another
9365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9369 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9372 , we would get errors.
9375 \begin_layout Subsection
9377 \begin_inset Index idx
9380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9389 \begin_layout Standard
9390 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9391 We have several examples of nested environments.
9392 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9397 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9400 \begin_layout Labeling
9401 \labelwidthstring MMM
9402 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9411 \begin_layout Labeling
9412 \labelwidthstring MMM
9413 #2-a This is level #2.
9414 We created it by using
9417 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9423 arg "depth-increment"
9430 \begin_layout Labeling
9431 \labelwidthstring MMM
9432 #3-a This is level #3.
9433 This time, we just enter
9440 arg "depth-increment"
9444 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9448 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9454 arg "depth-increment"
9461 \begin_layout Standard
9466 environment, nested inside of
9467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9475 So, it's at level #4.
9476 We did this by entering
9479 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9485 arg "depth-increment"
9488 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9493 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9509 \begin_layout Standard
9514 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9517 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9523 \begin_layout Labeling
9524 \labelwidthstring MMM
9525 #4-a This is level #4.
9529 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9532 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9537 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9541 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9546 keep nesting things inside
9547 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9558 \begin_layout Labeling
9559 \labelwidthstring MMM
9560 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9565 \begin_layout Labeling
9566 \labelwidthstring MMM
9567 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9568 and this is level #6.
9569 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9573 \begin_layout Labeling
9574 \labelwidthstring MMM
9575 #5-b Back to level #5.
9579 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9585 arg "depth-decrement"
9592 \begin_layout Labeling
9593 \labelwidthstring MMM
9597 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9603 arg "depth-decrement"
9606 , we're back at level #4.
9610 \begin_layout Labeling
9611 \labelwidthstring MMM
9612 #3-b Back to level #3.
9613 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9619 #2-b Back to level #2.
9624 \begin_layout Labeling
9625 \labelwidthstring MMM
9626 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9627 After this sentence, we will enter
9631 and change the paragraph environment back to
9638 \begin_layout Standard
9639 We could have also used the
9655 environment in place of the
9660 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9663 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9664 Example 2: Inheritance
9667 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9668 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9671 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9680 arg "depth-increment"
9684 \begin_inset Newline newline
9687 which, we will change to the
9695 \begin_layout Enumerate
9700 environment, at level #2.
9703 \begin_layout Enumerate
9704 Notice how the nested
9708 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9712 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9716 \begin_layout Standard
9717 We ended this example by entering
9722 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9726 and reset the nesting depth by using
9729 arg "depth-decrement"
9735 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9736 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9745 \begin_inset Argument 1
9748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9749 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9757 \begin_layout Enumerate
9758 This is level #1, in an
9762 paragraph environment.
9763 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9767 \begin_layout Enumerate
9772 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9778 arg "depth-increment"
9782 Now, what happens if we nest an
9786 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9787 label be? An asterisk?
9791 \begin_layout Itemize
9801 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9802 So, its label is a bullet.
9803 (We got here by using
9806 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9812 arg "depth-increment"
9815 , then changing the environment to
9823 \begin_layout Itemize
9824 Here's level #4, produced using
9827 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9833 arg "depth-increment"
9837 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9842 \begin_layout Enumerate
9845 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9850 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9854 , because we are in the
9862 environment (that is, it is an
9877 \begin_layout Enumerate
9882 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9883 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9887 \begin_layout Enumerate
9888 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9891 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9894 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9897 \begin_layout Enumerate
9901 arg "depth-decrement"
9904 to decrease the depth after the next
9907 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9914 \begin_layout Enumerate
9916 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9921 \begin_layout Enumerate
9923 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9924 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9928 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9938 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9943 reset the counter for the label.
9947 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9957 arg "depth-decrement"
9960 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9961 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9962 into the twofold-nested
9970 \begin_layout Enumerate
9971 The same thing happens if we do another
9974 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9980 arg "depth-decrement"
9983 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9986 \begin_layout Standard
9987 Lastly, we reset the environment to
9992 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10003 The number of other
10007 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10014 The same rule applies for the
10018 environment, as well.
10021 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10022 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10025 \begin_layout Enumerate
10026 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10027 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10028 the same detail with how we did it.
10037 \begin_layout Standard
10045 arg "depth-increment"
10052 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10053 the example in parentheses someplace.
10054 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10055 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10056 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10060 \begin_layout Enumerate
10065 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10069 \begin_layout Verse
10070 Now we will add verse.
10071 \begin_inset Newline newline
10074 It will get much worse.
10075 \begin_inset Newline newline
10085 arg "depth-increment"
10095 \begin_layout Verse
10096 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10097 \begin_inset Newline newline
10100 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10101 \begin_inset Newline newline
10107 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10115 \begin_layout Verse
10116 Here comes a table:
10120 \begin_layout Standard
10121 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10127 \begin_layout Standard
10129 \begin_inset Tabular
10130 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10131 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10132 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10133 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10218 \begin_layout Verse
10222 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10232 arg "depth-increment"
10238 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10244 \begin_inset Newline newline
10252 arg "depth-decrement"
10259 \begin_layout Enumerate
10264 : level #1) This is another item.
10265 Note that selecting a
10269 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10270 3 times to put the table inside the
10278 \begin_layout Quotation
10279 We're now ending the
10283 list and changing to
10288 We're still at level #1.
10289 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10290 The next set of paragraphs is a
10291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10298 We will nest both the
10305 \begin_inset space ~
10310 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10314 for the letter body.
10318 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10321 to preserve the depth.
10322 Remember that you need to use
10325 arg "newline-insert newline"
10328 to create multiple lines inside the
10335 \begin_inset space ~
10345 \begin_layout Right Address
10347 \begin_inset Newline newline
10350 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10351 \begin_inset Newline newline
10357 \begin_layout Address
10359 \begin_inset space ~
10365 \begin_layout Quotation
10366 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10370 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10371 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10372 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10373 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10374 as soon as possible.
10375 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10378 \begin_layout Quotation
10379 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10380 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10381 with your order, along with payment.
10384 \begin_layout Quotation
10385 We thank you again for your patience.
10388 \begin_layout Address
10390 \begin_inset Newline newline
10397 \begin_layout Quotation
10398 That ends that example!
10401 \begin_layout Standard
10402 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10403 gives you a lot of power with just
10405 We could have easily nested an
10426 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10429 \begin_layout Subsection
10431 \begin_inset Index idx
10434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10435 Nesting ! Separation
10441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10443 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10450 \begin_layout Standard
10451 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10453 For example you need two different enumerations:
10456 \begin_layout Enumerate
10461 \begin_layout Enumerate
10466 \begin_layout Enumerate
10470 \begin_layout Standard
10471 \begin_inset Separator plain
10477 \begin_layout Itemize
10483 \begin_layout Standard
10484 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10490 \begin_layout Enumerate
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Enumerate
10502 \begin_layout Standard
10503 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10504 list item and use the menu
10506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10507 Start New Environment
10510 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10511 ) and behind it the new list.
10514 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10515 Start New Parent Environment
10517 only appears if the item is nested.
10518 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10522 \begin_layout Standard
10523 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10524 (red arrow in LyX).
10525 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10526 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10529 \begin_layout Standard
10530 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10533 arg "paragraph-break"
10540 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10543 \begin_layout Section
10544 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10545 \begin_inset Index idx
10548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10557 \begin_layout Standard
10558 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10559 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10561 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10562 be broken at the end of a line.
10563 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10567 \begin_layout Subsection
10569 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10571 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10576 \begin_inset Index idx
10579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10588 \begin_layout Standard
10589 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10590 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10591 ) not to break the line at
10593 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10596 \begin_layout Quote
10597 Further documentation is given in section
10598 \begin_inset Newline newline
10602 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10604 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10612 \begin_layout Standard
10613 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10626 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10628 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10637 A protected space is set with
10639 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10640 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10642 \begin_inset space ~
10650 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10656 \begin_layout Subsection
10658 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10660 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10665 \begin_inset Index idx
10668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10669 Spacing ! Horizontal
10677 \begin_layout Standard
10678 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10680 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10681 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10685 The length units are listed in Appendix
10686 \begin_inset space ~
10690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10692 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10699 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10703 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10708 \begin_inset Index idx
10711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10712 Spaces ! Inter-word
10720 \begin_layout Standard
10721 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10722 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10723 at the ends of sentences.
10724 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10725 automatically takes care about this.
10726 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10727 followed by a period; see section
10728 \begin_inset space ~
10732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10734 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10739 To insert a normal space, select
10741 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10742 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10744 \begin_inset space ~
10752 arg "space-insert normal"
10758 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10760 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10762 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10767 \begin_inset Index idx
10770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10779 \begin_layout Standard
10781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10788 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10797 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10798 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10799 inside abbreviations:
10802 \begin_layout Quote
10804 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10808 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10811 \begin_layout Standard
10812 or between values and units.
10813 Compare for example this:
10814 \begin_inset Newline newline
10818 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10822 \begin_inset Newline newline
10825 10 kg (normal space
10828 \begin_layout Standard
10829 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10831 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10832 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10834 \begin_inset space ~
10842 arg "space-insert thin"
10848 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10852 \begin_layout Standard
10853 You can also insert the following space types:
10856 \begin_layout Description
10858 \begin_inset space ~
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10865 space A line with a
10866 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10870 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10874 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10877 negative thin space between the arrows.
10880 \begin_layout Description
10882 \begin_inset space ~
10886 \begin_inset space ~
10889 space A line with a
10890 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10894 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10898 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10901 negative medium space between the arrows.
10904 \begin_layout Description
10906 \begin_inset space ~
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10913 space A line with a
10914 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10918 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10922 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10925 negative thick space between the arrows.
10928 \begin_layout Description
10930 \begin_inset space ~
10934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10938 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10942 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10946 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10950 \begin_inset space ~
10954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10957 em) space between the arrows.
10960 \begin_layout Description
10962 \begin_inset space ~
10966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10970 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10974 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10978 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10982 \begin_inset space ~
10986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10989 em) space between the arrows.
10992 \begin_layout Description
10994 \begin_inset space ~
10998 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11002 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11006 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11010 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11014 \begin_inset space ~
11018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11021 em) space between the arrows.
11024 \begin_layout Description
11026 \begin_inset space ~
11030 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11034 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 cm space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Standard
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11057 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11061 lists the different space sizes.
11064 \begin_layout Standard
11065 \begin_inset Float table
11070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11071 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11076 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11080 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11090 \begin_inset Tabular
11091 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11092 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11093 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11094 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11192 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11206 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11210 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11238 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11277 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11367 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11369 \begin_inset Index idx
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11381 \begin_layout Standard
11382 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11383 feature for adding extra space
11384 in a uniform fashion.
11385 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11386 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11387 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11388 equally between themselves.
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11392 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11395 \begin_layout Quote
11397 This is on the left side
11398 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11401 This is on the right
11404 \begin_layout Quote
11407 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11411 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11417 \begin_layout Quote
11420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11424 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11428 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11434 \begin_layout Standard
11435 That was an example in the
11441 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11452 is one in a standard paragraph.
11453 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11457 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11460 \begin_layout Standard
11461 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11464 \begin_inset space ~
11469 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11472 \begin_layout Standard
11474 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11478 \begin_inset space ~
11484 \begin_layout Standard
11486 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11490 \begin_inset space ~
11496 \begin_layout Standard
11498 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11502 \begin_inset space ~
11508 \begin_layout Standard
11510 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11514 \begin_inset space ~
11520 \begin_layout Standard
11522 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11526 \begin_inset space ~
11532 \begin_layout Standard
11534 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11538 \begin_inset space ~
11544 \begin_layout Standard
11545 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11553 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11557 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11559 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11560 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11564 option in the space dialog.
11572 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11576 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11581 \begin_inset Index idx
11584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11593 \begin_layout Standard
11594 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11595 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11598 \begin_layout Standard
11599 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11602 What is correct English?:
11603 \begin_inset Newline newline
11607 \begin_inset Newline newline
11611 \begin_inset space ~
11614 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11615 \begin_inset Newline newline
11619 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11630 \begin_inset Newline newline
11634 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11645 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11651 \begin_layout Standard
11653 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11658 \begin_inset space ~
11662 \begin_inset space ~
11666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11670 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11672 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11673 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11677 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11694 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11703 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11704 That is why it is named
11705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11713 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11714 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11718 \begin_layout Subsection
11720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11722 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11727 \begin_inset Index idx
11730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11739 \begin_layout Standard
11740 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11742 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11743 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11745 \begin_inset space ~
11751 There you find the following sizes:
11754 \begin_layout Standard
11767 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11768 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11773 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11775 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11776 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11778 \begin_inset space ~
11784 \begin_inset Index idx
11787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11788 Document ! Settings
11793 for the paragraph separation.
11794 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11805 \begin_layout Standard
11811 \begin_inset Index idx
11814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11820 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11821 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11826 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11827 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11836 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 s are described in section
11846 \begin_inset space ~
11850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11852 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11861 If there are several
11865 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11866 You can therefore use
11870 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11873 \begin_layout Standard
11878 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11879 \begin_inset space ~
11883 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11885 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11892 \begin_layout Standard
11893 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11903 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11904 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11916 \begin_layout Subsection
11917 Paragraph Alignment
11918 \begin_inset Index idx
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 Paragraph ! Alignment
11930 \begin_layout Standard
11931 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11933 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11936 dialog (toolbar button
11939 arg "layout-paragraph"
11943 There are five possibilities:
11946 \begin_layout Itemize
11954 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11960 \begin_layout Itemize
11968 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11974 \begin_layout Itemize
11982 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11988 \begin_layout Itemize
11996 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12002 \begin_layout Itemize
12010 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12016 \begin_layout Standard
12017 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12018 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12019 the left and right margins.
12020 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12023 \begin_layout Standard
12025 This paragraph is right aligned,
12028 \begin_layout Standard
12030 this one is centered,
12033 \begin_layout Standard
12035 this one is left aligned.
12038 \begin_layout Subsection
12040 \begin_inset Index idx
12043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12044 Page breaks ! Forced
12050 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12052 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12059 \begin_layout Standard
12060 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12061 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12062 force a page break where you want one.
12063 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12064 is good at page breaking.
12065 Only if you use a lot of
12069 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12070 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12073 \begin_layout Standard
12074 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12075 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12079 have to change the page breaking.
12082 \begin_layout Standard
12083 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12085 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12088 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12090 \begin_inset space ~
12096 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12098 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12099 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12101 \begin_inset space ~
12106 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12108 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12109 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12112 \begin_layout Standard
12113 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12114 at the top of a page.
12115 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12117 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12118 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12119 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12123 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12127 to learn more about
12134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12138 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12143 \begin_inset Index idx
12146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12147 Page breaks ! Clear
12155 \begin_layout Standard
12156 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12157 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12158 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12159 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12160 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12163 \begin_layout Standard
12164 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12167 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12169 \begin_inset space ~
12175 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12177 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12178 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12180 \begin_inset space ~
12184 \begin_inset space ~
12189 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12190 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12193 \begin_layout Subsection
12195 \begin_inset Index idx
12198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12207 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12214 \begin_layout Standard
12215 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12217 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12220 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12222 \begin_inset space ~
12226 \begin_inset space ~
12234 arg "newline-insert newline"
12238 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12240 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12241 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12243 \begin_inset space ~
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12255 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12258 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12260 This is useful to avoid
12261 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12265 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12268 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12271 \begin_layout Standard
12272 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12273 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12275 very good at line breaking.
12276 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12277 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12278 \begin_inset space ~
12282 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12284 reference "sec:Quote"
12289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12291 reference "sec:Verse"
12296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12298 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12305 \begin_layout Subsection
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12309 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12314 \begin_inset Index idx
12317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12326 \begin_layout Standard
12328 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12339 \begin_layout Standard
12343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12344 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12346 \begin_inset space ~
12351 you can insert horizontal lines.
12352 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12353 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12354 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12357 \begin_layout Standard
12359 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12370 \begin_layout Section
12371 Characters and Symbols
12374 \begin_layout Standard
12375 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12376 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12377 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12379 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12385 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12389 for information on how this is done.
12392 \begin_layout Standard
12393 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12398 dialog via the menu
12400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12401 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12407 \begin_layout Standard
12408 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12416 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12417 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12419 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12427 \begin_layout Section
12428 Fonts and Text Styles
12429 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12431 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12438 \begin_layout Subsection
12440 \begin_inset Index idx
12443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12452 \begin_layout Standard
12453 There are two types of fonts:
12456 \begin_layout Description
12458 \begin_inset space ~
12462 \begin_inset Index idx
12465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12471 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12476 characters) in the font.
12477 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12478 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12479 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12480 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12481 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12482 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12483 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12484 \begin_inset Newline newline
12487 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12488 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12489 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12490 sizes than at small ones.
12491 \begin_inset Newline newline
12505 \begin_inset space ~
12513 \begin_layout Description
12515 \begin_inset space ~
12519 \begin_inset Index idx
12522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12528 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12529 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12530 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12531 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12532 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12533 image manipulation program.
12534 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12535 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12536 \begin_inset space ~
12539 pixels high up to 34
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12543 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12544 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12545 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12547 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12548 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12549 \begin_inset Newline newline
12552 Bitmap fonts are named
12555 \begin_inset space ~
12560 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12563 \begin_layout Standard
12564 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12565 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12566 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12567 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12568 use scalable fonts.
12571 \begin_layout Standard
12572 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12575 \begin_layout Standard
12576 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12577 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12578 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12579 font to emphasize text, you use an
12580 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12588 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12590 In \SpecialChar LyX
12591 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12595 \begin_layout Subsection
12598 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12600 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12607 \begin_layout Standard
12608 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12609 used its own fonts.
12610 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12611 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12614 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12615 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12616 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12617 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12618 to a word processor.
12619 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12620 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12621 files are very portable across
12622 different machines.
12623 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 has increased a lot
12625 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12628 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12630 \begin_inset space ~
12634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12636 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12641 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12642 code in the document
12643 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12646 \begin_layout Standard
12647 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12648 engines that are also able directly
12649 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12651 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12653 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12655 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12656 that is installed on your system.
12657 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12660 \begin_layout Standard
12661 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12669 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12670 es; so you might have to experiment.
12678 \begin_layout Subsection
12679 Document Font and Font size
12680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12682 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12687 \begin_inset Index idx
12690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12697 \begin_inset Index idx
12700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12709 \begin_layout Standard
12710 You can set the document fonts in the
12712 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12716 \begin_inset Index idx
12719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12720 Document ! Settings
12730 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12731 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12734 \begin_inset space ~
12743 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12745 \begin_inset space ~
12748 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12751 \begin_layout Standard
12756 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12757 This requires that you use
12769 as the output format, i.
12770 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12774 \begin_inset space \space{}
12777 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12778 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12779 installed (see section
12780 \begin_inset space ~
12784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12786 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12791 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12793 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12794 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12796 \begin_inset space ~
12799 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12800 cannot determine the family.
12801 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12802 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12805 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12808 \begin_layout Standard
12809 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12810 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12815 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12821 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12822 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12830 \begin_inset space ~
12836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12849 European Computer Modern
12852 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12859 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12862 \begin_layout Standard
12871 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12872 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12877 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12880 \begin_inset space ~
12885 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12891 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12892 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12895 \begin_layout Itemize
12899 \begin_inset space ~
12904 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12917 \begin_inset space ~
12922 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12923 community in order to replace
12927 as the default font.
12928 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12929 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12932 \begin_inset space ~
12945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12946 One difference is improved kerning.
12954 \begin_layout Itemize
12958 \begin_inset space ~
12962 \begin_inset space ~
12967 fonts in (the rare) case that
12970 \begin_inset space ~
12975 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12990 Virtual means that it
12991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13002 -glyphs from other fonts.
13003 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13005 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13017 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13025 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13031 \begin_inset Index idx
13034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13036 -packages ! aeguill
13041 with the document preamble line
13042 \begin_inset Newline newline
13049 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13050 \begin_inset Newline newline
13055 will fix the guillemet problem.
13060 and that accented characters are not
13064 glyph, but built of
13068 characters, the accent and the letter.
13069 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13075 If you search for example for the French word
13076 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13080 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13083 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13092 and not for the glyph
13093 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13097 \begin_inset space ~
13101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13107 \begin_layout Itemize
13108 If you do not like the look of
13116 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13121 \begin_inset space ~
13127 \begin_inset space ~
13137 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13138 \begin_inset space ~
13141 serif and typewriter fonts,
13145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13146 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13147 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13162 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13167 \begin_inset space \space{}
13175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13179 \begin_inset space \space{}
13185 \begin_inset space ~
13193 \begin_inset space ~
13203 but you can also select your own.
13204 \begin_inset Newline newline
13207 The differences between roman,
13210 \begin_inset space ~
13219 fonts are explained in section
13220 \begin_inset space ~
13224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13226 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13231 \begin_inset Newline newline
13237 \begin_inset space ~
13242 was originally designed for newspapers.
13243 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13244 into the small newspaper columns.
13248 \begin_inset space ~
13253 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13256 \begin_layout Standard
13257 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13270 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13275 depends on the class you are using.
13276 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13279 \begin_layout Standard
13280 Note that the font size is the
13285 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13286 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13287 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13288 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13291 \begin_inset space ~
13297 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13298 \begin_inset space ~
13302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13304 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13311 \begin_layout Standard
13315 \begin_inset space ~
13320 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13322 \begin_inset space ~
13325 serif or typewriter.
13330 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13340 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13343 \begin_layout Standard
13348 LaTeX font encoding
13350 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13351 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13357 \begin_inset Index idx
13360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13362 -packages ! fontenc
13368 \begin_inset space ~
13372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13374 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13379 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13380 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13387 \begin_layout Standard
13388 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13390 Use Old Style Figures
13394 Use True Small Caps
13397 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13400 Use Old Style Figures
13402 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13404 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13412 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13416 Use True Small Caps
13418 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13419 of scaled capitals.
13420 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13421 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13424 \begin_layout Standard
13429 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13430 a font to display the script characters.
13434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13435 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13441 \begin_inset Index idx
13444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13451 So this has no effect for the document language
13465 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13469 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13477 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13482 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13483 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13485 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13487 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13490 dialog, see section
13491 \begin_inset space ~
13495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13497 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13509 \begin_layout Subsection
13513 \begin_layout Standard
13514 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13515 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13517 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13518 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13519 choose a math font in the dialog
13521 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13525 \begin_inset Index idx
13528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13529 Document ! Settings
13535 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13536 automatically selects a math font.
13537 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13538 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13541 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13547 \begin_inset space ~
13553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13558 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13559 document font is available.
13562 \begin_layout Standard
13563 Note that the math font will not be used for
13567 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13573 or by the insertion of the command
13580 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13581 \begin_inset space ~
13585 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13586 while the math characters do not.
13588 \begin_inset space ~
13591 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13594 \begin_inset space ~
13602 \begin_inset space ~
13607 in the document font settings.
13610 \begin_layout Standard
13611 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13612 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13613 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13614 font (in most cases
13615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13621 \begin_inset space ~
13627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13630 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13631 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13639 \begin_inset space ~
13645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13651 \begin_layout Subsection
13652 Using Different Character Styles
13653 \begin_inset Index idx
13656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13663 \begin_inset Index idx
13666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13675 \begin_layout Standard
13676 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13677 automatically changes the character style for certain
13678 paragraph environments.
13680 supports two character styles,
13689 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13693 \begin_layout Standard
13698 style, do one of the following:
13701 \begin_layout Itemize
13702 click on the toolbar button
13711 \begin_layout Itemize
13712 use the key binding
13721 \begin_layout Standard
13722 These commands are all toggles.
13727 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13730 \begin_layout Standard
13731 One typically uses the
13735 style for proper names.
13737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13744 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13752 \begin_layout Standard
13753 A more widely used character style is the
13758 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13765 \begin_layout Itemize
13766 clicking on the toolbar button
13775 \begin_layout Itemize
13776 using the keybindings
13785 \begin_layout Standard
13790 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13792 use a different font.
13795 \begin_layout Standard
13796 We've been using the
13800 style all over the place in this document.
13801 Here's one more example:
13804 \begin_layout Quotation
13807 Do not overuse character styles!
13810 \begin_layout Standard
13811 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13812 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13813 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13814 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13818 \begin_layout Standard
13819 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13827 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13829 \begin_inset space ~
13832 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13838 arg "dialog-show character"
13844 \begin_layout Subsection
13845 Fine-Tuning with the
13850 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13852 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13857 \begin_inset Index idx
13860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13869 \begin_layout Standard
13870 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13872 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13873 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13874 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13875 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13876 from ordinary dialog.
13879 \begin_layout Standard
13880 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13881 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13882 \begin_inset Newline newline
13885 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13886 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13889 \begin_layout Standard
13890 To use custom character styles, open the
13892 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13894 \begin_inset space ~
13897 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13900 dialog or press the toolbar button
13903 arg "dialog-show character"
13907 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13908 font property that you can choose.
13909 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13912 \begin_inset space ~
13917 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13922 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13923 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13924 environments all at once.
13927 \begin_layout Standard
13928 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13931 \begin_inset space ~
13943 \begin_layout Labeling
13944 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13958 The possible options are:
13962 \begin_layout Labeling
13963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13968 This is the Roman font family.
13969 Normally a serif font.
13970 It's also the default family.
13980 \begin_layout Labeling
13981 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13985 \begin_inset space ~
13992 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14004 \begin_layout Labeling
14005 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14012 This is the Typewriter font family.
14018 arg "font-typewriter"
14027 \begin_layout Labeling
14028 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14033 This corresponds to the print weight.
14038 \begin_layout Labeling
14039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14044 This is the Medium font series.
14045 It's also the default series.
14048 \begin_layout Labeling
14049 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14056 This is the Bold font series.
14069 \begin_layout Labeling
14070 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14075 As the name implies.
14080 \begin_layout Labeling
14081 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14086 This is the Upright font shape.
14087 It's also the default shape.
14090 \begin_layout Labeling
14091 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14105 s the Italic font shape
14111 \begin_layout Labeling
14112 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14119 This is the Slanted font shape
14121 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14122 , this is different from italic).
14125 \begin_layout Labeling
14126 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14130 \begin_inset space ~
14137 This is the Small caps font shape
14144 \begin_layout Labeling
14145 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14150 Alters the text color.
14151 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14155 \begin_inset space ~
14160 , which means that the document default color set in
14162 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14163 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14169 \begin_inset space ~
14174 is used, you can choose between
14251 \begin_inset Index idx
14254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14263 \begin_layout Labeling
14264 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14269 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14270 the language of the document.
14271 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14272 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14274 \begin_inset Newline newline
14277 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14279 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14280 When using the spell checking (see section
14281 \begin_inset space ~
14285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14287 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14291 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14294 \begin_layout Labeling
14295 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14300 Alters the size of the font.
14301 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14302 proportional to the document font size.
14303 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14304 the details, but a general description of what
14310 \begin_layout Labeling
14311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14332 arg "font-size tiny"
14338 \begin_layout Labeling
14339 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14360 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14366 \begin_layout Labeling
14367 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14388 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14394 \begin_layout Labeling
14395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14416 arg "font-size small"
14422 \begin_layout Labeling
14423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14437 It's also the default size.
14441 arg "font-size normal"
14447 \begin_layout Labeling
14448 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14469 arg "font-size large"
14475 \begin_layout Labeling
14476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14497 arg "font-size larger"
14503 \begin_layout Labeling
14504 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14525 arg "font-size largest"
14531 \begin_layout Labeling
14532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14553 arg "font-size huge"
14559 \begin_layout Labeling
14560 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14581 arg "font-size giant"
14587 \begin_layout Labeling
14588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14593 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14613 arg "font-size increase"
14619 \begin_layout Labeling
14620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14625 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14645 arg "font-size decrease"
14652 \begin_layout Standard
14657 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14658 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14660 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14661 — use those instead.
14662 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14665 \begin_layout Labeling
14666 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14671 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14676 \begin_layout Labeling
14677 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14684 This is text with emphasize on
14687 This might seem like the same as
14691 , but it is actually a bit different.
14697 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14699 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14702 \begin_layout Labeling
14703 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14710 This is text with Underbar on.
14716 arg "font-underline"
14722 \begin_inset Newline newline
14727 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14728 when you could not change fonts.
14729 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14730 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14731 because some people
14735 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14738 \begin_layout Labeling
14739 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14743 \begin_inset space ~
14750 This is text with Double underbar on.
14756 arg "font-underunderline"
14760 \begin_inset Newline newline
14763 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14764 about double underbar.
14767 \begin_layout Labeling
14768 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14772 \begin_inset space ~
14779 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14785 arg "font-underwave"
14789 \begin_inset Newline newline
14792 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14793 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14796 \begin_layout Labeling
14797 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14804 This is text with Strikeout on.
14810 arg "font-strikeout"
14814 \begin_inset Newline newline
14817 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14818 changed in the meantime.
14821 \begin_layout Labeling
14822 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14829 This is text with Noun on.
14836 , this is a logical attribute.
14837 Normally it's equivalent to
14840 \begin_inset space ~
14849 \begin_layout Standard
14850 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14851 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14853 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14855 \begin_inset space ~
14858 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14864 arg "dialog-show character"
14867 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14868 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14871 arg "textstyle-apply"
14875 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14879 \begin_layout Standard
14880 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14887 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14888 (suppose you just set the shape to
14889 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14893 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14897 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14901 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14907 \begin_inset space ~
14919 \begin_layout Standard
14920 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14928 \begin_inset space ~
14940 \begin_layout Itemize
14946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14953 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14962 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14971 \begin_inset Newline newline
14975 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14989 \begin_inset Note Note
14992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14993 For more on phantoms see section
14994 \begin_inset space ~
14998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15000 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15010 \begin_inset Newline newline
15016 \begin_layout Itemize
15021 fonts use characters with serifs.
15022 These are the small
15023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15030 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15031 The following example shows the difference:
15032 \begin_inset Newline newline
15036 \begin_inset Newline newline
15041 text without serifs
15044 \begin_inset Newline newline
15047 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15048 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15055 \begin_layout Itemize
15060 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15061 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15062 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15065 \begin_layout Standard
15066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15073 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15074 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15077 \begin_inset space ~
15082 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15083 the property to be removed.
15084 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15085 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15086 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15104 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15105 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15113 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15117 \begin_inset space ~
15122 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15133 If you, for example, set
15134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15152 \begin_inset space ~
15157 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15166 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15169 \begin_layout Standard
15170 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15171 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15174 \begin_layout Section
15175 Printing and Previewing
15178 \begin_layout Subsection
15182 \begin_layout Standard
15183 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15184 using \SpecialChar LyX
15185 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15186 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15187 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15188 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15190 Additional Features
15195 \begin_layout Standard
15197 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15200 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15201 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15202 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15205 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15206 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15207 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15208 to turn your writing into printable output.
15209 This happens in two stages:
15212 \begin_layout Enumerate
15213 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15214 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15216 a file with the extension,
15217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15225 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15231 \begin_layout Enumerate
15232 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15233 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15234 to use the commands in the
15238 file to produce printable output.
15241 \begin_layout Subsection
15242 Output file formats
15243 \begin_inset Index idx
15246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15253 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15255 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15262 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15263 Simple text (ASCII)
15264 \begin_inset Index idx
15267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15268 File formats ! ASCII
15276 \begin_layout Standard
15277 This file type has the extension
15278 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15286 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15290 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15294 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15301 \begin_layout Standard
15302 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15304 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15305 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15307 \begin_inset space ~
15313 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15314 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15315 bibliography (section
15316 \begin_inset space ~
15320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15322 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15327 If your document includes such material, use
15329 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15330 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15332 \begin_inset space ~
15336 \begin_inset space ~
15340 \begin_inset space ~
15348 \begin_inset space ~
15352 \begin_inset space ~
15358 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15359 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15362 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15365 \begin_inset Index idx
15368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15369 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15378 \begin_layout Standard
15379 This file type has the extension
15380 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15391 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15394 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15395 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15396 -Errors or to process it manually
15397 with console commands.
15398 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15399 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15400 's temporary directory whenever you
15401 view or export your document.
15404 \begin_layout Standard
15405 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15406 -file using the menu
15408 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15409 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15413 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15414 export variants are explained in section
15415 \begin_inset space ~
15419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15421 reference "subsec:Export"
15428 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15430 \begin_inset Index idx
15433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15442 \begin_layout Standard
15443 This file type has the extension
15444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15464 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15465 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15466 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15470 \begin_layout Standard
15471 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15472 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15473 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15474 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15475 when you view the DVI.
15476 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15479 \begin_layout Standard
15480 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15482 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15483 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15488 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15489 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15491 \begin_inset space ~
15497 The latter option uses the program
15499 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15505 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15508 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15509 font access (see section
15510 \begin_inset space ~
15514 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15516 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15521 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15522 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15527 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15529 \begin_inset Index idx
15532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15533 File formats ! PostScript
15541 \begin_layout Standard
15542 This file type has the extension
15543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15551 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15555 PostScript was developed by the company
15559 as a printer language.
15560 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15562 PostScript can be seen as a
15563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15566 programming language
15567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15570 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15575 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15582 \begin_inset Index idx
15585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15587 -packages ! pstricks
15597 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15600 \begin_layout Standard
15601 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15605 Encapsulated PostScript
15606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15609 (EPS, file extension
15610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15622 As \SpecialChar LyX
15623 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15624 convert them in the background to EPS.
15625 If, for example, you have 50
15626 \begin_inset space ~
15629 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15631 \begin_inset space ~
15634 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15635 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15637 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15638 EPS to avoid this problem.
15641 \begin_layout Standard
15642 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15644 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15645 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15651 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15653 \begin_inset Index idx
15656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15663 \begin_inset Index idx
15666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15675 \begin_layout Standard
15676 This file type has the extension
15677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15693 Portable Document Format
15694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15701 was derived from PostScript.
15702 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15711 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15712 looks exactly the same.
15715 \begin_layout Standard
15716 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15720 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15724 (JPG, file extension
15725 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15733 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15752 Portable Network Graphics
15753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15756 (PNG, file extension
15757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15769 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15770 converts them in the
15771 background to one of these formats.
15772 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15773 will slow down your workflow.
15774 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15777 \begin_layout Standard
15778 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15780 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15786 \begin_layout Description
15788 \begin_inset space ~
15791 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15795 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15798 \begin_layout Description
15800 \begin_inset space ~
15807 ) This uses the program
15809 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15812 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15815 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15818 is a new engine, derived from
15822 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15823 access (see section
15824 \begin_inset space ~
15828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15830 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15835 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15836 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15841 \begin_layout Description
15843 \begin_inset space ~
15850 ) This uses the program
15855 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15861 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15862 font access (see section
15863 \begin_inset space ~
15867 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15869 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15874 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15875 vertically written Japanese.
15878 \begin_layout Description
15880 \begin_inset space ~
15883 (cropped) This is the same as
15886 \begin_inset space ~
15891 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15892 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15893 to generate good-looking
15894 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15897 \begin_layout Description
15899 \begin_inset space ~
15902 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15906 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15910 \begin_layout Description
15912 \begin_inset space ~
15915 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15919 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15920 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15924 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15925 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15928 \begin_layout Standard
15932 \begin_inset space ~
15941 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15942 works without problems.
15943 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15944 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15948 \begin_inset space ~
15956 \begin_inset space ~
15961 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15969 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15971 \begin_inset Index idx
15974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15975 FileFormats ! XHTML
15981 \begin_inset Index idx
15984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15993 \begin_layout Standard
15994 This file type has the extension
15995 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16003 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16007 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16008 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16009 When \SpecialChar LyX
16010 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16011 suitable for the purpose.
16012 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16014 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16015 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16018 between different formats, which are described in section
16020 Math Output in XHTML
16025 \begin_inset space ~
16033 \begin_layout Standard
16034 XHTML output remains
16035 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16039 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16042 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16043 features are supported yet.
16047 and the World Wide Web
16051 Additional Features
16053 manual, for more information.
16056 \begin_layout Standard
16057 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16059 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16060 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16066 \begin_layout Subsection
16068 \begin_inset Index idx
16071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16080 \begin_layout Standard
16081 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16082 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16091 or use the toolbar button
16098 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16099 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16100 \begin_inset space ~
16104 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16106 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16110 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16112 \begin_inset space ~
16116 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16118 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
16123 Further output formats can be selected via
16125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16126 View (Other Formats)
16128 or the toolbar button
16137 \begin_layout Standard
16138 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16139 viewer window using the menu
16141 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16146 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16147 Update (Other Formats)
16152 \begin_layout Standard
16153 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16156 To have a real output, export your document.
16159 \begin_layout Section
16160 A few Words about Typography
16161 \begin_inset Index idx
16164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16173 \begin_layout Subsection
16174 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16175 \begin_inset Index idx
16178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16185 \begin_inset Index idx
16188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16197 \begin_layout Standard
16198 In \SpecialChar LyX
16200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16208 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16211 character comes in four lengths: the
16223 , and the minus sign:
16224 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16230 \begin_layout Standard
16231 \begin_inset Tabular
16232 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16233 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16234 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16235 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16236 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16237 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16266 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16306 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16333 \begin_inset space ~
16336 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16343 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16370 \begin_inset space ~
16373 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16394 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16428 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16434 \begin_layout Standard
16435 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16447 character multiple times in a row.
16448 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16449 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16456 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16468 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16482 \begin_layout Standard
16483 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16484 math mode and has a length of its own.
16485 Here are some examples:
16488 \begin_layout Enumerate
16489 line- and page-breaks
16490 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16500 \begin_layout Enumerate
16502 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16512 \begin_layout Enumerate
16513 Oh — there's a dash.
16514 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16524 \begin_layout Enumerate
16525 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16529 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16539 \begin_layout Subsection
16541 \begin_inset Index idx
16544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16553 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16560 \begin_layout Standard
16561 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16562 but automatically in the output.
16563 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16569 \begin_inset Index idx
16572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16579 following the rules of the document language.
16582 \begin_layout Standard
16584 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16588 font and with unusual constructs, like
16589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16597 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16598 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16599 This is done with the menu
16601 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16602 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16604 \begin_inset space ~
16610 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16612 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16616 \begin_layout Standard
16617 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16618 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16629 would then see the hyphen
16630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16637 as a hyphenation possibility.
16638 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16639 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16640 as described in section
16642 Prevent Hyphenation
16647 \begin_inset space ~
16655 \begin_layout Subsection
16657 \begin_inset Index idx
16660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16670 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16671 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16673 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16680 \begin_layout Standard
16681 When \SpecialChar LyX
16682 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16683 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16685 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16691 appropriate amount of space.
16692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16695 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16697 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16698 gets after another word.
16701 \begin_layout Standard
16702 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16703 not work in all cases.
16705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16716 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16717 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16720 \begin_layout Standard
16721 Here are some examples of
16725 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16728 \begin_layout Itemize
16733 \begin_layout Itemize
16738 \begin_layout Standard
16739 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16742 \begin_layout Itemize
16744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16748 this is too much space!
16751 \begin_layout Itemize
16756 \begin_layout Standard
16757 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16760 \begin_layout Standard
16761 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16764 \begin_layout Enumerate
16768 \begin_inset space ~
16773 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16774 \begin_inset space ~
16778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16780 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16785 \begin_inset Index idx
16788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16789 Spaces ! inter-word
16797 \begin_layout Enumerate
16801 \begin_inset space ~
16806 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16807 \begin_inset space ~
16811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16813 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16818 \begin_inset Index idx
16821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16830 \begin_layout Enumerate
16834 \begin_inset space ~
16838 \begin_inset space ~
16842 \begin_inset space ~
16849 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16856 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16857 This function is also bound to
16860 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16866 \begin_layout Standard
16867 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16870 \begin_layout Itemize
16872 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16876 \begin_inset space \space{}
16879 this is too much space!
16882 \begin_layout Itemize
16883 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16887 \begin_layout Standard
16888 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16889 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16891 will take care of this.
16894 \begin_layout Standard
16895 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16899 \begin_inset space ~
16905 feature described in the section
16907 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16912 Additional Features
16917 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16919 \begin_inset Index idx
16922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16923 Typography ! Quotes
16929 \begin_inset Index idx
16932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16963 \begin_layout Standard
16965 usually sets quotes correctly.
16966 Specifically, it will use an opening quote at the beginning of quoted text,
16967 and use a closing quote at the end.
16969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16977 The keyboard character,
16981 , generates this automatically.
16982 \change_inserted 986154928 1464030688
16987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16989 \change_inserted 986154928 1464016381
16990 You can, of course, remove this
16991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16998 keybinding if you prefer.
17000 \begin_inset space ~
17004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17006 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
17020 \begin_layout Standard
17021 You can specify what character the
17025 key produces using the submenu
17031 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17035 \begin_inset Index idx
17038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17039 Document ! Settings
17049 There are six choices:
17052 \begin_layout Labeling
17053 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17076 \begin_layout Labeling
17077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17080 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17084 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17089 Use quotes like ”this”
17092 \begin_layout Labeling
17093 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17096 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17100 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17106 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17110 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17116 \begin_layout Labeling
17117 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17120 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17124 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17130 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17134 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17140 \begin_layout Labeling
17141 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17144 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17148 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17154 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17158 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17164 \begin_layout Labeling
17165 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
17168 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17172 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17178 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17182 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17188 \begin_layout Standard
17190 \change_inserted 986154928 1464016392
17192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17202 \change_deleted 986154928 1464016400
17208 arg "quote-insert single"
17214 \begin_layout Subsection
17216 \begin_inset Index idx
17219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17220 Typography ! Ligatures
17226 \begin_inset Index idx
17229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17258 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17260 name "subsec:Ligatures"
17267 \begin_layout Standard
17268 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
17269 print them as single characters.
17270 These groups are known as
17275 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
17276 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
17278 Here are the standard ligatures:
17281 \begin_layout Itemize
17285 \begin_layout Itemize
17289 \begin_layout Itemize
17293 \begin_layout Itemize
17297 \begin_layout Itemize
17301 \begin_layout Standard
17302 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
17305 \begin_layout Standard
17306 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
17307 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
17308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17315 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
17316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17331 To break a ligature, use
17333 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17334 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17336 \begin_inset space ~
17343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17351 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17354 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17371 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
17373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17379 \begin_layout Subsection
17381 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
17383 \begin_inset Index idx
17386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17396 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
17403 \begin_layout Standard
17406 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17407 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
17411 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
17414 \begin_layout Description
17416 The name of the game.
17419 \begin_layout Description
17421 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
17425 \begin_layout Description
17427 The \SpecialChar TeX
17428 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
17432 \begin_layout Description
17433 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
17434 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17438 \begin_layout Standard
17439 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17441 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17445 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
17449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17453 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
17454 world to give programs geek version numbers.
17455 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
17456 converges to the number
17457 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
17460 : The actual version is
17461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17469 , the previous one was
17470 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17475 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17481 \begin_layout Subsection
17483 \begin_inset Index idx
17486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17495 \begin_layout Standard
17496 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
17497 space between two words.
17498 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
17501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17508 for units use the menu
17510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17511 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17513 \begin_inset space ~
17521 arg "space-insert thin"
17527 \begin_layout Standard
17528 Here is an example to show the differences:
17531 \begin_layout Standard
17532 \begin_inset Tabular
17533 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
17534 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17535 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17536 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17543 \begin_inset space ~
17547 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17559 space between number and unit
17566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17571 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17575 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
17583 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17587 half space between number and unit
17600 \begin_layout Subsection
17602 \begin_inset Index idx
17605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17606 Typography ! Widows and orphans
17614 \begin_layout Standard
17615 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
17617 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
17618 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
17619 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
17620 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
17621 These bits of text became known as
17632 \begin_layout Standard
17633 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
17634 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
17635 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
17636 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
17637 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
17638 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
17639 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
17640 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
17641 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
17642 \begin_inset Newline newline
17650 \begin_inset Newline newline
17658 \begin_inset Newline newline
17661 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17662 preamble of your document to avoid them.
17663 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
17665 \begin_inset space ~
17669 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17671 key "latexcompanion"
17676 \begin_inset space ~
17680 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
17686 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
17687 's page break mechanism.
17690 \begin_layout Chapter
17691 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
17692 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17694 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
17701 \begin_layout Standard
17702 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
17705 \begin_inset space ~
17711 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
17714 \begin_layout Section
17716 \begin_inset Index idx
17719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17735 \begin_layout Standard
17737 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
17740 \begin_layout Description
17743 \begin_inset space ~
17746 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
17747 \begin_inset Newline newline
17751 \begin_inset Note Note
17754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17755 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
17763 \begin_layout Description
17764 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
17765 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17766 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17769 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17770 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17772 \begin_inset space ~
17778 \begin_inset Newline newline
17782 \begin_inset Note Comment
17785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17786 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
17795 \begin_layout Description
17797 \begin_inset space ~
17800 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
17801 set in the document settings under
17803 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
17805 \begin_inset space ~
17811 \begin_inset Newline newline
17815 \begin_inset Newline newline
17819 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
17822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17828 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
17829 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
17834 of a comment that appears in the output.
17840 \begin_inset Newline newline
17844 \begin_inset Newline newline
17847 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
17850 \begin_layout Standard
17851 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
17859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17863 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
17866 \begin_layout Section
17868 \begin_inset Index idx
17871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17880 name "sec:Footnotes"
17887 \begin_layout Standard
17889 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
17892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17895 or the toolbar button
17898 arg "footnote-insert"
17910 \begin_inset Graphics
17911 filename clipart/footnote.png
17920 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
17921 's representation of your footnote.
17931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17939 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17950 label, the box will
17954 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
17955 Clicking on the box label again will close
17968 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
17969 and click on the footnote
17984 \begin_layout Standard
17985 Here is an example footnote:
17993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17994 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18002 \begin_layout Standard
18003 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18004 position where the footnote box is placed.
18005 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18006 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18007 according to the document class.
18009 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18010 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
18016 ey are described in the
18019 \begin_inset space ~
18027 \begin_layout Section
18029 \begin_inset Index idx
18032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18041 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
18048 \begin_layout Standard
18049 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
18051 When you insert a margin note via the menu
18053 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18055 \begin_inset space ~
18060 or the toolbar button
18063 arg "marginalnote-insert"
18082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18089 appearing within your text.
18090 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18091 's representation of your margin
18100 \begin_layout Standard
18101 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
18105 \begin_inset Marginal
18108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18110 This is a marginal note.
18118 \begin_layout Standard
18119 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
18120 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
18121 pages, right on odd pages.
18124 \begin_layout Standard
18125 For further information about marginal notes see the section
18128 \begin_inset space ~
18136 \begin_inset space ~
18144 \begin_layout Section
18145 Graphics and Images
18146 \begin_inset Index idx
18149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18156 \begin_inset Index idx
18159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18166 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18168 name "sec:Graphics"
18175 \begin_layout Standard
18176 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
18177 you want and click on the toolbar icon
18180 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
18185 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18189 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
18192 \begin_layout Standard
18193 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
18198 tab allows you to choose your image file.
18199 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
18201 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
18202 \begin_inset space ~
18206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18208 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
18215 \begin_layout Standard
18220 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
18221 of the image in the output.
18222 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
18226 \begin_inset space ~
18230 \begin_inset space ~
18239 \begin_inset space ~
18243 \begin_inset space ~
18247 \begin_inset space ~
18252 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
18253 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
18261 \begin_layout Standard
18265 \begin_inset space ~
18269 \begin_inset space ~
18274 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
18275 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
18277 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
18282 \begin_inset space ~
18287 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
18288 with the image size is printed.
18291 \begin_layout Standard
18292 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
18293 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
18295 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
18298 \begin_layout Standard
18300 \begin_inset Graphics
18301 filename clipart/mobius.eps
18309 \begin_layout Standard
18310 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
18311 the image into a float, see section
18312 \begin_inset space ~
18316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18318 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
18325 \begin_layout Subsection
18327 \begin_inset Index idx
18330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18339 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
18346 \begin_layout Standard
18347 You can insert images in any known file format.
18348 But as we explained in section
18349 \begin_inset space ~
18353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18355 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18359 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
18361 therefore uses the program
18365 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
18366 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
18367 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
18368 \begin_inset space ~
18372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18374 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
18381 \begin_layout Standard
18382 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
18385 \begin_layout Description
18387 \begin_inset space ~
18390 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
18391 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
18392 Well-known bitmap image formats are
18393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18396 Graphics Interchange Format
18397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18400 (GIF, file extension
18401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 \begin_inset Index idx
18416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18448 Portable Network Graphics
18449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18452 (PNG, file extension
18453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18465 \begin_inset Index idx
18468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18500 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18504 (JPG, file extension
18505 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18529 \begin_inset Index idx
18532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18563 \begin_layout Description
18565 \begin_inset space ~
18568 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
18570 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
18571 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
18572 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
18573 \begin_inset Newline newline
18576 Scalable image formats can be
18577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18580 Scalable Vector Graphics
18581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18584 (SVG, file extension
18585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18597 \begin_inset Index idx
18600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18632 Encapsulated PostScript
18633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18636 (EPS, file extension
18637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18649 \begin_inset Index idx
18652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18681 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18684 Portable Document Format
18685 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18688 (PDF, file extension
18689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18701 \begin_inset Index idx
18704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18712 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18719 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
18720 result will not be scalable.
18721 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
18726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18727 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
18735 \begin_layout Standard
18736 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
18743 \begin_layout Subsection
18744 Grouping of Image Settings
18745 \begin_inset Index idx
18748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18749 Images ! Settings grouping
18757 \begin_layout Standard
18758 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
18760 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
18761 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
18763 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
18764 need to manually change each of them.
18768 \begin_layout Standard
18769 A new group can be set by pressing the button
18772 \begin_inset space ~
18776 \begin_inset space ~
18788 \begin_inset space ~
18792 \begin_inset space ~
18798 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
18799 and checking the name of the desired group.
18802 \begin_layout Section
18804 \begin_inset Index idx
18807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18823 \begin_layout Standard
18824 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
18827 arg "tabular-insert"
18832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18836 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
18837 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
18838 from the rest of the table.
18839 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
18840 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
18842 Here is an example table:
18845 \begin_layout Standard
18847 \begin_inset Tabular
18848 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
18849 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18850 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18851 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18852 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
18853 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
18979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
18992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19053 \begin_layout Subsection
19057 \begin_layout Standard
19058 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
19061 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
19065 This brings up the table dialog.
19066 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
19067 cursor is placed currently.
19068 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
19069 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
19070 done on all of your selection.
19073 \begin_layout Standard
19074 In addition to the table dialog, the
19077 \begin_inset space ~
19082 helps you in setting table properties.
19083 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
19086 \begin_layout Standard
19090 \begin_inset space ~
19095 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
19096 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
19097 current cell respectively.
19098 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
19100 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
19101 of text, see section
19102 \begin_inset space ~
19106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19108 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
19115 \begin_layout Standard
19116 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
19117 using the check box
19126 This will merge the cells to
19130 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
19131 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
19132 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
19133 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
19134 in the last row without the upper border:
19137 \begin_layout Standard
19139 \begin_inset Tabular
19140 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
19141 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
19142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19143 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
19144 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19145 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19156 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19165 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19241 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19250 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19253 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19276 \begin_layout Standard
19277 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19278 -arguments for the table.
19279 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
19280 explained in the chapter
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19293 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
19294 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
19295 but are visible in the output.
19298 \begin_layout Standard
19299 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
19302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19307 Most DVI-viewers are
19311 able to display rotations.
19319 \begin_layout Standard
19324 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
19329 adds lines for all cell borders.
19332 \begin_layout Subsection
19334 \begin_inset Index idx
19337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19338 Tables ! Multi-page
19344 \begin_inset Index idx
19347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19356 \begin_layout Standard
19357 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
19360 \begin_inset space ~
19364 \begin_inset space ~
19372 \begin_inset space ~
19377 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
19378 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
19381 \begin_layout Description
19386 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19387 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
19388 except for the first page, if
19391 \begin_inset space ~
19399 \begin_layout Description
19403 \begin_inset space ~
19408 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
19409 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
19412 \begin_layout Description
19417 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19418 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
19419 except for the last page, if
19422 \begin_inset space ~
19430 \begin_layout Description
19434 \begin_inset space ~
19439 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
19440 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
19443 \begin_layout Description
19444 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
19445 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
19447 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19451 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
19454 \begin_inset space ~
19462 \begin_layout Standard
19463 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
19464 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
19465 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
19471 In this context, first means first in this order:
19474 \begin_inset space ~
19486 \begin_inset space ~
19491 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
19494 \begin_layout Standard
19496 \begin_inset Tabular
19497 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
19498 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
19499 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
19500 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19501 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19502 <row endfirsthead="true">
19503 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19509 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
19514 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19523 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19533 <row endfirsthead="true">
19534 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19545 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19554 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19566 <row endhead="true">
19567 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19578 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19597 <row endhead="true">
19598 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19609 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19618 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19630 <row endfoot="true">
19631 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19642 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19651 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19682 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19899 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19961 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
19986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20003 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20034 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20054 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20209 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20333 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20364 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20386 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20572 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20623 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20632 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
20635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20641 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20652 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20683 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20714 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20725 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20745 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20787 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20807 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20838 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20869 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20900 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20911 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20931 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20993 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21024 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21055 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21086 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21117 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21148 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21179 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21210 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21241 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21272 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21303 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21323 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21334 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21365 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21396 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21407 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21427 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21458 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21489 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21520 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21582 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21612 <row endlastfoot="true">
21613 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21624 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21633 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21650 \begin_layout Subsection
21652 \begin_inset Index idx
21655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21664 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
21671 \begin_layout Standard
21672 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
21673 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
21674 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
21675 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
21679 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
21682 \begin_layout Standard
21683 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
21684 for the column in the table dialog.
21685 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
21686 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
21690 \begin_layout Standard
21692 \begin_inset Tabular
21693 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
21694 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21695 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21696 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
21697 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21786 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 This is longer now.
21847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21898 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
21899 This is longer now.
21904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21930 \begin_layout Standard
21931 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
21932 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
21936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21937 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
21938 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
21944 Selection with the mouse or with
21948 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
21949 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
21950 the selection from outside the table.
21953 \begin_layout Section
21955 \begin_inset Index idx
21958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21965 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21974 \begin_layout Subsection
21978 \begin_layout Standard
21979 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
21980 have a fixed location.
21982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21989 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
21997 \begin_inset space ~
22002 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22003 too many notes on the current page.
22006 \begin_layout Standard
22007 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22008 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22009 and pages without text.
22010 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22011 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22012 Floats are therefore numbered.
22013 Referencing is described in section
22014 \begin_inset space ~
22018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22020 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22027 \begin_layout Standard
22028 To insert a float, use the menu
22030 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22034 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
22035 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
22037 After the label you can insert the caption text.
22038 \begin_inset Index idx
22041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22047 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
22048 paragraph within the float.
22049 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
22050 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
22051 left-clicking on the box label.
22052 A closed float box looks like this:
22053 \begin_inset Graphics
22054 filename clipart/float.png
22059 – a gray button with a red label.
22062 \begin_layout Standard
22063 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
22065 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
22068 \begin_layout Subsection
22070 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22072 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22077 \begin_inset Index idx
22080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 Floats ! Figure floats
22089 \begin_layout Standard
22091 \begin_inset space ~
22095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22097 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22101 was created using the menu
22103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22104 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22110 arg "float-insert figure"
22114 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
22117 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22123 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
22127 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
22128 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
22130 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
22132 \begin_inset space ~
22140 arg "layout-paragraph"
22146 \begin_layout Standard
22147 \begin_inset Float figure
22152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22154 \begin_inset Graphics
22155 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22165 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22170 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
22174 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
22187 \begin_layout Standard
22188 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
22189 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
22191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22200 ) and refer to it using the menu
22202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22208 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
22212 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
22213 vague references like
22214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22221 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
22222 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
22224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22232 For more about cross-references, see section
22233 \begin_inset space ~
22237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22239 reference "sec:Cross-References"
22246 \begin_layout Standard
22247 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
22248 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
22249 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
22250 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
22251 as described in section
22252 \begin_inset space ~
22256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22258 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
22264 \begin_inset space ~
22268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22270 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22274 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
22275 You can also set the images one below the other.
22277 \begin_inset space ~
22281 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22283 reference "fig:Undefinable"
22288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22290 reference "fig:Platypus"
22294 are the subfigures.
22297 \begin_layout Standard
22298 \begin_inset Float figure
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22304 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22308 \begin_inset Float figure
22313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22314 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22319 name "fig:Undefinable"
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22332 \begin_inset Graphics
22333 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
22344 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22348 \begin_inset Float figure
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22354 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22359 name "fig:Platypus"
22371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22372 \begin_inset Graphics
22373 filename clipart/platypus.eps
22385 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22392 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22397 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
22401 Two distorted images.
22414 \begin_layout Subsection
22416 \begin_inset Index idx
22419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22420 Floats ! Table floats
22428 \begin_layout Standard
22429 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
22431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22432 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
22435 or the toolbar button
22438 arg "float-insert table"
22442 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
22443 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
22444 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
22446 \begin_inset space ~
22450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22452 reference "tab:Table-float"
22459 \begin_layout Standard
22460 \begin_inset Float table
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 \begin_inset Caption Standard
22468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22471 name "tab:Table-float"
22483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22485 \begin_inset Tabular
22486 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
22487 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22488 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22489 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22490 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
22625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
22641 \end{array}\right]$
22649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22662 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
22683 \begin_layout Subsection
22685 \begin_inset Index idx
22688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22697 \begin_layout Standard
22699 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
22700 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
22701 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
22703 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
22711 \begin_inset space ~
22719 \begin_layout Section
22721 \begin_inset Index idx
22724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22733 \begin_layout Standard
22735 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
22737 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
22738 \begin_inset space \space{}
22745 \begin_layout Standard
22746 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
22747 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
22749 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22753 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
22754 and its alignment within the page.
22757 \begin_layout Standard
22759 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22769 height_special "totalheight"
22774 backgroundcolor "none"
22777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22780 This is a minipage.
22781 The text is set in an italic style.
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22787 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
22788 another formatting.
22796 \begin_layout Standard
22797 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22800 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
22804 as described in section
22805 \begin_inset space ~
22809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22811 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
22816 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
22822 \begin_layout Standard
22823 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22833 height_special "totalheight"
22838 backgroundcolor "none"
22841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22842 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22843 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22849 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
22853 \begin_inset Box Frameless
22863 height_special "totalheight"
22868 backgroundcolor "none"
22871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
22873 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
22881 \begin_layout Standard
22882 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
22888 \begin_layout Standard
22889 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
22891 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
22898 \begin_inset space ~
22906 \begin_layout Chapter
22907 Mathematical Formulas
22908 \begin_inset Index idx
22911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22918 \begin_inset Index idx
22921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22950 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22952 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
22959 \begin_layout Standard
22960 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
22965 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
22968 \begin_layout Section
22970 \begin_inset Index idx
22973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22982 \begin_layout Standard
22983 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
22996 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
22998 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
22999 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23000 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23002 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23008 \begin_layout Standard
23009 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23013 \begin_inset space ~
23018 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
23021 \begin_layout Standard
23022 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
23023 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
23026 \begin_layout Standard
23027 This is a line with an inline formula
23028 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
23034 \begin_layout Standard
23035 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
23036 paragraph, like this one:
23037 \begin_inset Formula
23044 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
23047 \begin_layout Standard
23049 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
23051 For example, typing
23052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23062 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23065 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
23066 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
23070 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
23073 \begin_inset space ~
23081 \begin_layout Subsection
23082 Navigating in Formulas
23083 \begin_inset Index idx
23086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23095 \begin_layout Standard
23096 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
23097 achieved with the arrow keys.
23099 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
23100 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
23105 will leave a formula construct (a square root
23106 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
23110 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
23114 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23117 \end{array}\right]$
23125 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
23130 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
23131 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
23134 \begin_layout Standard
23139 , printed in this document as
23140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23144 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23151 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
23152 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
23153 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
23158 For example, if you want
23159 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
23167 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23177 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23181 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23186 , since in the latter case only the
23189 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
23194 will be under the square root sign:
23195 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
23201 \begin_layout Standard
23202 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
23204 \begin_inset Formula
23206 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
23215 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
23216 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
23219 \begin_layout Subsection
23223 \begin_layout Standard
23224 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
23225 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
23229 and a cursor movement key to select text.
23230 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
23231 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
23232 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
23233 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
23237 \begin_layout Subsection
23238 Exponents and Subscripts
23239 \begin_inset Index idx
23242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23249 \begin_inset Index idx
23252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23261 \begin_layout Standard
23262 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
23265 arg "math-superscript"
23271 arg "math-subscript"
23274 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
23276 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
23279 , type in a formula
23282 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23292 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
23298 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
23302 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
23308 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23314 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
23316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23323 , you have to use an extra
23327 to separate the circumflex and the character.
23328 For example, if you want
23329 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
23335 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23341 Subscripts are similar: To get
23342 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
23348 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23356 \begin_layout Subsection
23358 \begin_inset Index idx
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 \begin_layout Standard
23371 Create a fraction either with the command
23377 or by using the icon
23380 arg "math-insert \\frac"
23386 \begin_inset space ~
23392 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
23393 The cursor is above the fraction line.
23394 To move it to the bottom, simply press
23399 To move back up, press
23404 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
23405 \begin_inset Formula
23407 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
23410 \end{array}\right)}\right]
23418 \begin_layout Subsection
23420 \begin_inset Index idx
23423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 \begin_layout Standard
23433 Roots can be created using the
23436 \begin_inset space ~
23444 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
23450 arg "math-insert \\root"
23472 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
23478 always produces a square root.
23481 \begin_layout Subsection
23482 Operators with Limits
23483 \begin_inset Index idx
23486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23493 \begin_inset Index idx
23496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23505 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23512 \begin_layout Standard
23514 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
23518 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
23521 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
23522 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
23523 by entering them as you would enter a super-
23524 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
23525 The sum operator will automatically place its
23526 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23533 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
23535 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
23539 \begin_inset Formula
23541 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
23546 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
23550 \begin_layout Standard
23551 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
23553 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
23554 behind the operator and using the menu
23556 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23557 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
23559 \begin_inset space ~
23563 \begin_inset space ~
23577 \begin_layout Standard
23578 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
23579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23583 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23587 \begin_inset Index idx
23590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23597 \begin_inset Formula
23599 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
23604 which will place the
23605 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
23609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23613 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23617 In inline formulas it looks like this:
23618 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
23624 \begin_layout Standard
23625 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
23632 Have a look at section
23633 \begin_inset space ~
23637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23639 reference "subsec:Functions"
23643 for an explanation of function macros.
23646 \begin_layout Subsection
23648 \begin_inset Index idx
23651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23660 \begin_layout Standard
23661 Most math symbols can be found in the
23664 \begin_inset space ~
23669 under one of several categories; including
23686 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
23690 \begin_layout Standard
23691 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
23692 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
23693 don't have to use the
23696 \begin_inset space ~
23701 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
23703 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
23706 \begin_layout Subsection
23708 \begin_inset Index idx
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23720 \begin_layout Standard
23721 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
23727 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
23733 \begin_inset space ~
23741 arg "math-insert \\space"
23745 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
23746 For example, the sequence
23751 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
23754 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
23756 \begin_inset Graphics
23757 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
23762 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
23763 the space marker and enter space again several times.
23764 With every space enter the size will be changed.
23765 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
23766 , because they are negative
23768 Here are two examples:
23771 \begin_layout Standard
23781 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
23787 \begin_layout Standard
23797 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
23803 \begin_layout Subsection
23805 \begin_inset Index idx
23808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23817 name "subsec:Functions"
23824 \begin_layout Standard
23828 \begin_inset space ~
23833 contains under the button
23836 arg "math-insert \\functions"
23839 a number of function macros, such as
23840 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
23844 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
23852 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
23859 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
23860 avoid confusions, because
23861 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
23865 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
23871 \begin_layout Standard
23872 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
23874 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
23878 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
23884 \begin_layout Standard
23885 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
23886 are placed, as described in section
23887 \begin_inset space ~
23891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23893 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
23900 \begin_layout Subsection
23902 \begin_inset Index idx
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23914 \begin_layout Standard
23915 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
23917 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
23918 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
23919 commands, for example, to enter
23920 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
23923 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
23924 Our example is entered by typing
23929 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
23936 \begin_inset space ~
23940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23942 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
23946 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
23949 \begin_layout Standard
23950 \begin_inset Float table
23955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23959 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23961 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
23965 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
23973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23975 \begin_inset Tabular
23976 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
23977 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23978 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23979 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23980 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24064 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24118 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
24128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24159 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24172 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
24182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
24236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24280 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24334 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
24344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24388 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
24398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24442 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
24452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24470 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24496 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
24506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24541 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
24562 \begin_layout Standard
24563 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
24566 \begin_inset space ~
24574 arg "math-insert \\hat"
24577 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
24581 \begin_layout Section
24582 Brackets and Delimiters
24583 \begin_inset Index idx
24586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24593 \begin_inset Index idx
24596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24603 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24605 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24612 \begin_layout Standard
24613 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
24615 For some purposes, using just the keys
24620 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
24621 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
24622 toolbar delimiter icon
24625 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24629 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
24630 \begin_inset Formula
24632 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
24640 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
24641 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
24645 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
24648 and the expression on the right was entered using the
24654 \begin_inset Formula
24656 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
24664 \begin_layout Standard
24665 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
24666 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
24670 \begin_layout Standard
24671 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
24672 left side and right side.
24673 If you use the option
24676 \begin_inset space ~
24681 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
24682 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
24684 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
24689 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
24690 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
24693 \begin_layout Standard
24694 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
24695 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
24696 is to go inside the brackets.
24697 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
24702 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
24703 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
24704 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
24708 arg "math-delim ( )"
24714 \begin_layout Section
24715 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
24716 \begin_inset Index idx
24719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24726 \begin_inset Index idx
24729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24736 \begin_inset Index idx
24739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24740 Math ! Multi-line Equations
24748 \begin_layout Standard
24749 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24753 \begin_inset space ~
24761 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
24765 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
24766 Here is an example:
24767 \begin_inset Formula
24769 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24778 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
24779 \begin_inset space ~
24783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24785 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
24790 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
24791 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
24792 This alignment is set in the box
24797 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24846 for every column as default.
24847 For example, the sequence
24848 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24859 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
24860 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
24861 corresponds to the relevant column.
24862 The result will look like this:
24863 \begin_inset Formula
24866 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
24867 column & has & has\,right\\
24868 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
24877 \begin_layout Standard
24878 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
24881 arg "newline-insert newline"
24884 while the cursor is in the matrix.
24885 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
24887 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24890 or the math toolbar.
24893 \begin_layout Standard
24894 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
24895 It can be created with the menu
24897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24898 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24900 \begin_inset space ~
24912 Here is an example:
24913 \begin_inset Formula
24927 \begin_layout Standard
24928 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
24931 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
24934 arg "newline-insert newline"
24938 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
24943 arg "newline-insert newline"
24946 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
24947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24954 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
24955 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
24956 A new row is created by every further entry of
24959 arg "newline-insert newline"
24963 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
24964 Here is an example:
24965 \begin_inset Formula
24967 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
24968 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
24973 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
24974 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
24975 \begin_inset Formula
24977 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
24985 \begin_layout Standard
24986 The multi-line formula type described here is called
24993 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
24994 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
24995 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24997 reference "eq:asquared"
25002 The other types are described in section
25003 \begin_inset space ~
25007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25009 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
25016 \begin_layout Section
25017 Formula Numbering and Referencing
25018 \begin_inset Index idx
25021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25022 Math ! Formula numbering
25028 \begin_inset Index idx
25031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25032 Math ! Referencing formulas
25038 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25040 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
25047 \begin_layout Standard
25048 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
25050 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25051 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25053 \begin_inset space ~
25057 \begin_inset space ~
25065 arg "math-number-toggle"
25069 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25070 within parentheses.
25071 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
25072 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
25073 the document class.
25074 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
25075 separated by a dot:
25076 \begin_inset Formula
25086 arg "math-number-toggle"
25089 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
25090 You can only number displayed formulas.
25093 \begin_layout Standard
25094 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
25096 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25097 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25099 \begin_inset space ~
25103 \begin_inset space ~
25111 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
25114 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
25115 \begin_inset Formula
25118 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
25124 To number all lines use the shortcut
25127 arg "math-number-toggle"
25133 \begin_layout Standard
25134 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25137 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
25138 A label is inserted with the menu
25140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25149 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
25150 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
25151 It is recommended that you use the suggested
25152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25163 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
25164 label type when you have many labels in your document.
25165 We inserted in the following example the label
25166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25173 in the second line:
25174 \begin_inset Formula
25176 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
25177 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
25182 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
25183 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
25184 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
25186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25188 \begin_inset space ~
25196 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25200 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
25201 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25202 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
25203 as the formula number:
25206 \begin_layout Standard
25207 This is a cross-reference to equation (
25208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25210 reference "eq:tanhExp"
25217 \begin_layout Standard
25218 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
25219 's cross-reference box are described in section
25220 \begin_inset space ~
25224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25226 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25231 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
25239 \begin_layout Section
25240 User defined math macros
25241 \begin_inset Index idx
25244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25253 \begin_layout Standard
25255 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
25256 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
25257 Math macros are explained in section
25260 \begin_inset space ~
25272 \begin_layout Section
25276 \begin_layout Subsection
25278 \begin_inset Index idx
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25290 \begin_layout Standard
25291 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
25292 To set a font in a formula, use the
25295 \begin_inset space ~
25303 arg "math-insert \\font"
25306 , or enter its command, listed in table
25307 \begin_inset space ~
25311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25313 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25320 \begin_layout Standard
25321 \begin_inset Float table
25326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25327 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25330 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25332 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
25336 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
25344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 \begin_inset Tabular
25347 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
25348 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25349 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25350 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25382 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
25390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25409 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
25417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25436 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
25444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
25477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25496 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
25504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25519 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
25531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25557 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
25565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
25592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25618 \begin_layout Standard
25619 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
25622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25627 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
25643 \begin_layout Standard
25644 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
25645 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
25650 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
25651 space when you need a space in the box.
25652 Here is an example where
25653 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25657 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25664 denotes the set of numbers:
25665 \begin_inset Formula
25667 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
25675 \begin_layout Standard
25676 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
25677 You can, for example, put a character in
25686 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
25690 \begin_inset Newline newline
25693 So it is better not to use this feature.
25696 \begin_layout Standard
25697 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
25698 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
25702 \begin_inset Newline newline
25705 You can only print them emboldened using the command
25711 , which works like the other typeface commands:
25712 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
25718 \begin_layout Standard
25725 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
25728 \begin_layout Standard
25729 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
25731 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25732 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25734 \begin_inset space ~
25742 \begin_layout Subsection
25744 \begin_inset Index idx
25747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25756 \begin_layout Standard
25757 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
25759 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
25763 \begin_inset space ~
25767 \begin_inset space ~
25775 \begin_inset space ~
25783 arg "math-insert \\font"
25787 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
25788 in black instead of blue.
25789 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
25790 Here is an example:
25791 \begin_inset Formula
25794 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
25795 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
25804 \begin_layout Subsection
25806 \begin_inset Index idx
25809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25818 \begin_layout Standard
25819 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
25820 automatically chosen in most situations.
25838 For most characters,
25846 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
25847 and certain other structures, are set larger in
25852 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
25853 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
25854 thinks are appropriate.
25855 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
25858 arg "math-insert \\style"
25862 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
25863 For example, you can set
25864 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
25867 , which is normally in
25876 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
25880 The four styles are used in the following example:
25883 \begin_layout Standard
25884 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
25888 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
25892 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
25896 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
25902 \begin_layout Standard
25903 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
25904 is set in a particular size with the menu
25906 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25908 \begin_inset space ~
25913 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
25914 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
25915 will be adjusted to correspond.
25916 As an example here is a formula in the font size
25917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25927 \begin_layout Standard
25931 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
25937 \begin_layout Section
25938 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
25940 \begin_inset Index idx
25943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25950 \begin_inset Index idx
25953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25962 \begin_layout Standard
25964 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
25965 that are in common use.
25968 \begin_layout Subsection
25969 Enabling AMS-Support
25972 \begin_layout Standard
25973 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
25974 the document by selecting the checkbox
25977 \begin_inset space ~
25981 \begin_inset space ~
25985 \begin_inset space ~
25992 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
25996 \begin_inset Index idx
25999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26000 Document ! Settings
26008 \begin_inset space ~
26014 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26015 -errors in formulas,
26016 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
26019 \begin_layout Subsection
26021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26023 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26028 \begin_inset Index idx
26031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26032 Math ! Multi-line Equations
26040 \begin_layout Standard
26041 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26042 provides a selection of different formula types.
26044 allows you to choose between
26065 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
26066 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26072 , for an explanation of these formula types.
26075 \begin_layout Chapter
26079 \begin_layout Section
26081 \begin_inset Index idx
26084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26091 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26093 name "sec:Cross-References"
26100 \begin_layout Standard
26101 One of \SpecialChar LyX
26102 's strengths is cross-references.
26103 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
26105 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
26106 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
26107 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
26110 \begin_layout Enumerate
26114 \begin_layout Enumerate
26115 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26117 name "enu:Second-item"
26124 \begin_layout Enumerate
26128 \begin_layout Standard
26129 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
26131 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26134 or by pressing the toolbar button
26141 A gray label box like this:
26142 \begin_inset Graphics
26143 filename clipart/label.png
26148 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
26150 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
26152 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26160 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26165 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26177 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26185 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
26186 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
26188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26202 \begin_layout Standard
26203 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
26205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26208 or the toolbar button
26211 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26215 A gray cross-reference box like this:
26216 \begin_inset Graphics
26217 filename clipart/reference.png
26222 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
26224 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
26225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26237 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
26241 \begin_layout Standard
26242 As an alternative to
26244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26247 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
26252 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
26253 to the actual cursor position via the menu
26255 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26267 \begin_layout Standard
26268 Here is our cross-reference: Item
26269 \begin_inset space ~
26273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26275 reference "enu:Second-item"
26282 \begin_layout Standard
26283 It is recommended to use a protected space
26287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26288 described in section
26289 \begin_inset space ~
26293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26295 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
26304 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
26305 line breaks between them.
26308 \begin_layout Standard
26309 There are six formats of cross-references:
26312 \begin_layout Description
26313 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
26314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26316 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26323 \begin_layout Description
26324 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
26325 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
26327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26337 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26344 \begin_layout Description
26345 <page>: prints the page number: Page
26346 \begin_inset space ~
26350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26351 LatexCommand pageref
26352 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26359 \begin_layout Description
26361 \begin_inset space ~
26365 \begin_inset space ~
26368 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
26369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26370 LatexCommand vpageref
26371 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26376 \begin_inset Newline newline
26379 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
26380 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
26381 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
26382 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
26383 it prints “on the next page”.
26384 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
26387 \begin_layout Description
26389 \begin_inset space ~
26393 \begin_inset space ~
26397 \begin_inset space ~
26400 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
26401 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26403 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26408 \begin_inset Newline newline
26411 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
26417 ; otherwise it behaves like
26421 \begin_inset space ~
26425 \begin_inset space ~
26434 \begin_layout Description
26436 \begin_inset space ~
26439 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
26440 \begin_inset Newline newline
26444 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26452 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26462 \begin_inset Index idx
26465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26467 -packages ! prettyref
26473 \begin_inset Index idx
26476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26478 -packages ! refstyle
26489 \begin_inset Newline newline
26492 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
26493 -package should be used for this feature by setting
26496 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
26500 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26501 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
26509 is the default and preferred because
26513 supports only English documents.
26514 The format is specified by using the command
26526 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
26527 preamble of the document.
26528 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
26530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26541 ) can be done with this command
26542 \begin_inset Newline newline
26549 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
26554 \begin_inset Newline newline
26557 For more information about the format, have a look at the package documentations
26559 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
26561 key "prettyref,refstyle"
26568 \begin_layout Description
26570 \begin_inset space ~
26573 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
26574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26575 LatexCommand nameref
26576 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
26583 \begin_layout Standard
26584 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
26585 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
26587 The varieties are adjusted in the field
26591 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
26595 \begin_layout Standard
26596 You can only use the style
26600 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
26604 is always possible.
26607 \begin_layout Standard
26608 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
26609 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
26611 Referencing formulas is explained in section
26612 \begin_inset space ~
26616 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26618 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26625 \begin_layout Standard
26626 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
26630 \begin_inset space ~
26634 \begin_inset space ~
26639 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
26640 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
26643 \begin_inset space ~
26648 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
26649 You can also go back with the toolbar button
26652 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
26658 \begin_layout Standard
26659 You can change labels at any time.
26660 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
26661 do not need to think about this.
26664 \begin_layout Standard
26665 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
26667 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
26671 \begin_layout Standard
26672 References are described in detail in the section
26673 \begin_inset space ~
26683 \begin_inset space ~
26691 \begin_layout Section
26692 Table of Contents and other Listings
26693 \begin_inset Index idx
26696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26703 \begin_inset Index idx
26706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26707 Navigating ! Outline
26713 \begin_inset Index idx
26716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26732 \begin_layout Subsection
26734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26736 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
26743 \begin_layout Standard
26744 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
26746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26747 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
26749 \begin_inset space ~
26753 \begin_inset space ~
26759 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
26761 If you click on it, the
26765 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
26766 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
26767 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
26769 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
26771 \begin_inset space ~
26776 that is described in section
26777 \begin_inset space ~
26781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26783 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
26790 \begin_layout Standard
26791 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
26792 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
26794 \begin_inset space ~
26798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26800 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
26804 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
26806 \begin_inset space ~
26810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26812 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
26816 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
26818 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
26821 \begin_layout Subsection
26822 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
26823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26825 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26832 \begin_layout Standard
26833 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
26835 You can insert them via the
26837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26841 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
26844 \begin_layout Section
26845 URLs and Hyperlinks
26846 \begin_inset Index idx
26849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26856 \begin_inset Index idx
26859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26868 \begin_layout Subsection
26870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26879 \begin_layout Standard
26880 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
26882 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26888 \begin_layout Standard
26889 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
26891 \begin_inset Flex URL
26894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26904 \begin_layout Standard
26905 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
26911 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
26915 \begin_layout Standard
26916 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26924 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26933 \begin_layout Subsection
26935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26937 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
26944 \begin_layout Standard
26945 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
26947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26950 or with the toolbar button
26957 The appearing dialog has two fields:
26966 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
26967 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
26968 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26970 name "LyX's homepage"
26971 target "http://www.lyx.org"
26975 , an Email address like this:
26976 \begin_inset CommandInset href
26978 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
26979 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
26984 , or a link to a file.
26987 \begin_layout Standard
26988 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
26990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26998 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27001 to the link target.
27004 \begin_layout Standard
27005 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
27006 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
27007 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
27008 the text style dialog.
27009 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
27013 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27015 name "LyX's homepage"
27016 target "http://www.lyx.org"
27023 \begin_layout Standard
27024 The link text color can be changed, when the option
27028 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
27030 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27031 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27035 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
27037 \begin_inset Newline newline
27045 \begin_inset Newline newline
27052 in the PDF Properties dialog.
27055 \begin_layout Section
27057 \begin_inset Index idx
27060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27067 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27069 name "sec:Appendices"
27076 \begin_layout Standard
27077 Appendices are created with the menu
27079 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27081 \begin_inset space ~
27085 \begin_inset space ~
27091 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
27092 as the appendix part of the book.
27093 This part is marked with a red borderline.
27096 \begin_layout Standard
27097 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
27098 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
27099 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
27100 and the subsection number.
27101 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
27105 \begin_layout Standard
27107 \begin_inset space ~
27111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27113 reference "chap:Credits"
27118 \begin_inset space ~
27122 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27124 reference "subsec:Export"
27131 \begin_layout Section
27133 \begin_inset Index idx
27136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27143 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27145 name "sec:Bibliography"
27152 \begin_layout Standard
27153 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
27155 You can include a bibliography database,
27159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27160 Known under the name
27161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27164 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27174 which is explained in the next subsection, or you can insert the bibliography
27175 manually, using the paragraph environment
27179 , which was described in section
27180 \begin_inset space ~
27184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27186 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
27191 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
27192 this document, like author-year citations, then you must
27196 use a bibliography database.
27199 \begin_layout Subsection
27200 The Bibliography Environment
27203 \begin_layout Standard
27208 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
27210 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
27219 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
27221 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
27224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27231 , a short form of its title, as the key.
27234 \begin_layout Standard
27235 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
27237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27240 or the toolbar button
27243 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
27247 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
27248 containing the available citations.
27249 Select one or more keys from the list and
27259 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
27260 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
27264 \begin_layout Standard
27265 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
27266 entry with surrounding brackets.
27271 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
27272 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
27274 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27284 \begin_layout Standard
27288 Companion Second Edition
27291 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27293 key "latexcompanion"
27300 \begin_layout Standard
27301 The \SpecialChar LyX
27302 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
27303 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27312 \begin_layout Standard
27313 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
27316 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27318 \begin_inset space ~
27326 arg "layout-paragraph"
27330 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
27333 \begin_layout Subsection
27334 Bibliography databases (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27336 \begin_inset Index idx
27339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27340 Bibliography ! Databases
27346 \begin_inset Index idx
27349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27350 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27357 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27359 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
27366 \begin_layout Standard
27367 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same bibliography in different
27372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27373 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
27375 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
27376 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
27381 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
27383 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
27384 your working field in a database.
27385 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
27386 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
27387 list for that document.
27388 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
27392 \begin_layout Standard
27393 The database is a text file with the file extension
27394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27405 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
27406 The format is explained in
27407 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27413 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27415 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27417 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
27422 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
27423 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
27424 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
27426 \begin_inset Flex URL
27429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27431 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
27439 \begin_layout Standard
27440 To use a database, use the menu
27442 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27447 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27449 \begin_inset space ~
27455 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
27456 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
27463 Add bibliography to TOC
27465 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
27470 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
27471 in the document or just the cited references.
27474 \begin_layout Standard
27475 The style file is a text file with the file extension
27476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27487 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
27488 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
27489 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
27490 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
27492 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
27497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27498 For information on how this is done, have a look at
27499 \begin_inset Newline newline
27503 \begin_inset CommandInset href
27505 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
27517 \begin_layout Standard
27518 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
27521 \begin_layout Standard
27522 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
27523 uses the program Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27525 You can choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
27532 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27533 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27538 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
27539 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
27540 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
27544 The following variants are possible:
27547 \begin_layout Description
27548 biber provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory, but does not work
27549 with other bibliography packages (e.
27550 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27554 \begin_inset space \space{}
27561 ), only with the package
27565 ; recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
27569 \begin_layout Description
27570 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
27571 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
27572 with all bibliography packages, except
27577 \begin_layout Description
27578 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding,
27583 , works with all bibliography packages
27586 \begin_layout Standard
27587 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27588 can be controlled with options that you can add below the specification
27590 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
27593 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27597 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27606 \begin_layout Standard
27607 When you select the option
27609 Sectioned bibliography
27613 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27614 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27617 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
27618 This and other options are explained in detail in section
27620 Customizing Bibliographies
27624 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27629 Additional Features
27634 \begin_layout Standard
27635 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
27636 the two methods of creating them.
27637 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
27638 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
27639 We used the style file
27643 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
27646 \begin_layout Subsection
27648 \begin_inset Index idx
27651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27652 Bibliography ! Citation format
27660 \begin_layout Standard
27661 In the citation reference dialog you can set a special citation format.
27662 For this feature you need to enable the option
27668 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27672 \begin_inset Index idx
27675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27676 Document ! Settings
27686 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
27687 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
27688 style files as explained in
27689 the previous section.
27692 \begin_layout Standard
27693 You can also set text to appear before or after a citation reference, in
27694 the citation reference window.
27695 Here is an example where the text
27696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27700 \begin_inset space ~
27704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27707 appears after the reference:
27710 \begin_layout Standard
27712 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27715 key "latexcompanion"
27722 \begin_layout Section
27724 \begin_inset Index idx
27727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27743 \begin_layout Standard
27744 An index entry is created if you use the menu
27746 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27748 \begin_inset space ~
27753 or the toolbar button
27760 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
27761 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
27762 by \SpecialChar LyX
27763 as the index entry.
27766 \begin_layout Standard
27767 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
27769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27770 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27772 \begin_inset space ~
27778 A light blue box labeled
27779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27787 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27790 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
27791 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
27795 \begin_layout Standard
27796 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
27797 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
27798 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
27799 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27801 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27803 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
27810 \begin_layout Subsection
27811 Grouping Index Entries
27812 \begin_inset Index idx
27815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27824 \begin_layout Standard
27825 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
27827 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
27828 lists under the entry
27829 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27837 First we create the entry
27838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27846 \begin_inset space ~
27850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27852 reference "subsec:Lists"
27857 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
27858 \begin_inset space ~
27862 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27864 reference "sec:Itemize"
27868 , we insert the command
27871 \begin_layout Standard
27877 \begin_layout Standard
27881 \begin_layout Standard
27887 \begin_layout Standard
27888 for the enumerated list in section
27889 \begin_inset space ~
27893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27895 reference "sec:Enumerate"
27902 \begin_layout Standard
27903 The exclamation mark
27904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27911 marks the grouping levels.
27912 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
27913 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
27914 If we don't have an index entry for
27915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27919 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27922 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
27925 \begin_layout Subsection
27927 \begin_inset Index idx
27930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27931 Index ! Page ranges
27939 \begin_layout Standard
27940 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
27942 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
27943 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
27944 an index entry in section
27945 \begin_inset space ~
27949 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27951 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
27958 \begin_layout Standard
27961 Paragraph environments|(
27964 \begin_layout Standard
27965 and another entry at the end of section
27966 \begin_inset space ~
27970 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27972 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
27979 \begin_layout Standard
27982 Paragraph environments|)
27985 \begin_layout Standard
27987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27995 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27999 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28007 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28010 respectively start and end the index range.
28011 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
28012 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
28013 the pages of the indexed document parts.
28014 An example is the index entry
28015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28018 Document ! Settings
28019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28025 \begin_layout Subsection
28027 \begin_inset Index idx
28030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28031 Index ! Cross referencing
28039 \begin_layout Standard
28040 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
28041 We referred for example in the index entry
28042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28050 \begin_inset space ~
28054 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28056 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
28060 ) to the index entry
28061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28068 in the same section using the entry
28071 \begin_layout Standard
28074 GIF|see{Image formats}
28077 \begin_layout Standard
28078 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
28080 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
28081 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
28084 \begin_layout Subsection
28086 \begin_inset Index idx
28089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28090 Index ! Entry order
28098 \begin_layout Standard
28099 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
28100 follow the rules for the index order.
28101 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
28106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28107 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
28109 \begin_inset space ~
28113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28115 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28124 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
28125 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
28126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28150 \begin_inset Index idx
28153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28154 Dummy entries ! maïs
28160 \begin_inset Index idx
28163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28164 Dummy entries ! maître
28170 \begin_inset Index idx
28173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28174 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
28179 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
28180 maïs, maison, maître.
28181 To achieve this, we use the command
28184 \begin_layout Standard
28187 previous entry@current entry
28190 \begin_layout Standard
28191 In our case we want to have
28192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28207 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
28210 \begin_layout Standard
28216 \begin_layout Standard
28217 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
28218 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
28220 See the next subsection for an example.
28223 \begin_layout Standard
28224 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28230 \begin_layout Standard
28231 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
28236 to generate the index (see section
28237 \begin_inset space ~
28241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28243 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28252 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28253 -package aeguill in section
28254 \begin_inset space ~
28258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28260 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
28264 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
28265 -packages although all these index
28266 commands start with
28267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28280 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
28285 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
28288 \begin_layout Standard
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28312 \begin_layout Subsection
28314 \begin_inset Index idx
28317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28318 Index ! Entry layout
28326 \begin_layout Standard
28327 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
28328 \begin_inset Index idx
28331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28334 This is an italic dummy entry
28339 You can also format the page number using the character
28340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28347 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28348 -command without a backslash.
28349 We can write for example
28352 \begin_layout Standard
28355 italic page number:|textit
28358 \begin_layout Standard
28359 to get the page number in italic.
28360 \begin_inset Index idx
28363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28364 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
28369 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
28370 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
28372 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28380 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28388 \begin_inset space ~
28394 Have a look at section
28395 \begin_inset space ~
28399 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28401 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
28405 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28409 \begin_layout Standard
28410 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28418 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
28422 to generate the index, see section
28423 \begin_inset space ~
28427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28429 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
28438 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
28443 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
28444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28447 key "latexcompanion"
28459 \begin_layout Standard
28460 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
28462 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
28463 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
28464 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
28465 If so, put the following in the preamble
28468 \begin_layout Standard
28480 \begin_layout Standard
28484 \begin_layout Standard
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 in the index entry.
28492 \begin_inset Index idx
28495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28496 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
28501 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
28502 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
28503 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
28506 \begin_layout Standard
28507 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
28508 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
28509 a bold font for all index entries.
28510 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
28522 documentation for details,
28523 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28525 key "makeindex,xindy"
28532 \begin_layout Subsection
28534 \begin_inset Index idx
28537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28544 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28546 name "subsec:Index-Program"
28553 \begin_layout Standard
28554 If the index generation program
28558 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
28559 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
28563 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
28564 distribution, is used.
28568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28573 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
28574 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
28575 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
28576 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
28577 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
28587 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
28589 dialog, see section
28590 \begin_inset space ~
28594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28596 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
28601 The available options are listed and explained in
28602 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28604 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
28609 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
28613 \begin_layout Standard
28614 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
28615 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
28618 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28619 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28623 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
28624 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
28627 \begin_layout Subsection
28631 \begin_layout Standard
28632 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
28633 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
28634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28641 next to the standard index.
28643 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
28644 that add this feature.
28651 \begin_inset Index idx
28654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28656 -packages ! splitidx
28661 package to generate multiple indexes.
28662 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
28667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28668 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
28670 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28677 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
28678 style, but it also includes
28679 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
28680 Please consult the package's manual for details.
28688 \begin_layout Standard
28689 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
28690 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
28692 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28693 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28696 and select the option
28698 Use multiple Indexes
28705 already contains the standard index
28706 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28714 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
28715 also appear as a heading) to the
28719 input field and press the
28724 The new index now also appears in the list.
28725 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
28726 label color to the new index.
28729 \begin_layout Standard
28730 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
28733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28740 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
28741 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
28742 are additional features:
28745 \begin_layout Itemize
28746 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
28747 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
28750 \begin_layout Itemize
28751 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
28752 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
28753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28760 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
28761 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
28762 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
28763 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
28766 \begin_layout Section
28767 Nomenclature/Glossary
28768 \begin_inset Index idx
28771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28778 \begin_inset Index idx
28781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28812 name "sec:Nomenclature"
28819 \begin_layout Standard
28820 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
28821 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
28822 called nomenclature or glossary.
28825 \begin_layout Standard
28826 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28833 \begin_inset Index idx
28836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28838 -packages ! nomencl
28844 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
28846 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28852 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28856 \begin_layout Standard
28857 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
28858 and then use the menu
28860 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28866 \begin_inset space ~
28871 or the toolbar button
28874 arg "nomencl-insert"
28879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28887 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28890 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
28893 \begin_layout Standard
28894 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
28895 The first is the term or
28899 that you wish to define.
28904 of the term or symbol.
28907 \begin_layout Standard
28908 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28916 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
28917 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
28925 \begin_layout Subsection
28926 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
28927 \begin_inset Index idx
28930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28931 Nomenclature ! Layout
28939 \begin_layout Standard
28940 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
28944 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
28947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28951 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
28955 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28959 \begin_inset Newline newline
28967 \begin_inset Newline newline
28973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28980 character starts/ends the formula.
28981 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
28982 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
28984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28994 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
29004 \begin_layout Standard
29005 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29006 -syntax is given in section
29007 \begin_inset space ~
29011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29013 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29020 \begin_layout Standard
29024 \begin_inset space ~
29029 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
29031 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
29032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29036 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29043 in this document is:
29044 \begin_inset Newline newline
29049 dummy entry for the character
29054 \begin_inset Newline newline
29066 \begin_inset space ~
29076 font use the command
29105 \begin_layout Standard
29106 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
29107 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29111 \begin_inset space \space{}
29115 \begin_inset Newline newline
29131 \begin_inset Newline newline
29134 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
29135 This command will make the font of all symbols
29142 \begin_inset space ~
29150 \begin_layout Standard
29151 If the characters |
29152 \begin_inset space \space{}
29156 \begin_inset space \space{}
29160 \begin_inset space \space{}
29164 \begin_inset space \space{}
29168 \begin_inset space \space{}
29171 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
29172 a quote character in front of them.
29173 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29174 LatexCommand nomenclature
29175 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
29176 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
29183 \begin_layout Subsection
29184 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
29185 \begin_inset Index idx
29188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29189 Nomenclature ! Sort order
29197 \begin_layout Standard
29198 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29199 -code of the symbol
29201 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
29203 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
29206 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29207 LatexCommand nomenclature
29209 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
29216 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29220 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
29221 LatexCommand nomenclature
29224 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
29229 They will be sorted by
29230 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29256 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29259 will be sorted before the
29263 since the character
29264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29271 is considered in sorting.
29274 \begin_layout Standard
29275 To control the sort order, you can edit the
29278 \begin_inset space ~
29283 field of the nomenclature dialog.
29284 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
29286 For the example given, you can insert
29290 in this field for the
29291 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29298 will be located before
29299 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
29305 \begin_layout Standard
29306 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
29311 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29320 \begin_layout Subsection
29321 Nomenclature Options
29322 \begin_inset Index idx
29325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29326 Nomenclature ! Options
29334 \begin_layout Standard
29339 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
29340 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
29343 \begin_layout Description
29344 refeq Appends the phrase
29345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29360 to every nomenclature entry, where
29366 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
29369 \begin_layout Description
29370 refpage Appends the phrase
29371 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29383 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29386 to every nomenclature entry, where
29392 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
29395 \begin_layout Description
29396 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
29399 \begin_layout Standard
29400 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
29401 class options list in the
29403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29407 In this document the options
29414 \begin_layout Standard
29415 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29421 \begin_layout Standard
29422 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
29423 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
29428 field in the nomenclature dialog:
29431 \begin_layout Description
29441 \begin_layout Description
29444 nomrefpage Like the
29451 \begin_layout Description
29454 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
29463 \begin_layout Description
29467 \begin_inset space ~
29473 \begin_inset space ~
29478 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
29481 \begin_layout Standard
29483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29490 are automatically translated for some document languages.
29491 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
29495 \begin_layout Standard
29503 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
29506 \begin_inset Newline newline
29513 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
29518 \begin_inset Newline newline
29522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29537 by their translation.
29540 \begin_layout Subsection
29541 Printing the Nomenclature
29542 \begin_inset Index idx
29545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29546 Nomenclature ! Printing
29554 \begin_layout Standard
29555 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
29557 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29558 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29571 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29574 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
29575 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
29576 You can choose between these settings:
29579 \begin_layout Description
29580 Default a space of 1
29581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29587 \begin_layout Description
29589 \begin_inset space ~
29593 \begin_inset space ~
29596 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
29599 \begin_layout Description
29600 Custom custom space
29603 \begin_layout Standard
29604 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
29605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29613 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
29621 For example, in order to change the name to
29625 , add the following line to the preamble:
29628 \begin_layout Standard
29636 nomname}{List of Symbols}
29639 \begin_layout Subsection
29640 Nomenclature Program
29641 \begin_inset Index idx
29644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29645 Nomenclature ! Program
29651 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29653 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
29660 \begin_layout Standard
29666 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
29667 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
29669 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
29674 by adding options, see section
29675 \begin_inset space ~
29679 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29681 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
29686 The available options are listed and explained in
29687 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29689 key "nomencl,makeindex"
29696 \begin_layout Section
29698 \begin_inset Index idx
29701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29708 \begin_inset Index idx
29711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29712 Document ! Branches
29718 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29720 name "sec:Branches"
29727 \begin_layout Standard
29728 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
29729 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
29730 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
29731 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
29734 \begin_layout Standard
29735 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
29736 allows you to put text into branches.
29737 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
29738 To create a branch, either select the menu
29740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29741 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
29744 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
29746 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29753 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
29754 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
29755 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
29756 and whether the name of the branch should
29757 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
29758 (see below for an example).
29759 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
29760 to the name of the other) and to add
29761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29765 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29769 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29773 \begin_inset space ~
29776 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
29777 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
29780 \begin_layout Standard
29781 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
29782 These boxes are inserted via the menu
29784 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29787 where you can choose a branch.
29788 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
29792 \begin_layout Standard
29793 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
29794 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
29797 \begin_layout Standard
29798 \begin_inset Branch Question
29801 \begin_layout Standard
29802 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
29810 \begin_layout Standard
29811 \begin_inset Branch Answer
29814 \begin_layout Standard
29815 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
29823 \begin_layout Standard
29830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29831 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29834 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
29835 Consider for example a file
29836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29843 which has the above branches.
29845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29852 is active, the PDF export file would be called
29853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29876 branch were inactive,
29877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29889 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29892 branch was active, likewise
29893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29908 branch was active, and
29909 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29912 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
29913 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29916 if both branches were active.
29917 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
29920 \begin_layout Standard
29921 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
29927 \begin_layout Standard
29928 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
29929 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
29930 definitions for each branch.
29931 For example you can define for the question branch
29935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29936 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29937 -syntax, see section
29938 \begin_inset space ~
29942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29944 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
29956 \begin_layout Standard
29966 \begin_layout Standard
29976 \begin_layout Standard
29977 and for the answer branch
29980 \begin_layout Standard
29990 \begin_layout Standard
30000 \begin_layout Standard
30001 \begin_inset Branch Question
30004 \begin_layout Standard
30008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30036 \begin_layout Standard
30037 \begin_inset Branch Answer
30040 \begin_layout Standard
30044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30072 \begin_layout Standard
30073 Now it is possible to use the
30077 question{\SpecialChar ldots
30084 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
30087 commands to obtain conditional output.
30088 Here is an example formula where only the
30095 \begin_inset Formula
30097 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
30105 \begin_layout Standard
30106 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
30114 \begin_layout Standard
30115 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
30117 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30121 \begin_inset space \space{}
30124 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
30126 For this advanced usage, see the
30132 Flex insets and InsetLayout
30137 \begin_layout Section
30139 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30141 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
30146 \begin_inset Index idx
30149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30158 \begin_layout Standard
30161 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30162 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30165 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
30167 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30173 \begin_inset Index idx
30176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30178 -packages ! hyperref
30183 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
30184 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
30185 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
30186 part of the document.
30190 \begin_layout Standard
30191 The header information in the dialog tab
30195 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
30196 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
30197 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
30198 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
30202 \begin_inset space ~
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30211 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
30212 tries to extract the header information from your document title
30213 and author entries.
30217 \begin_inset space ~
30221 \begin_inset space ~
30225 \begin_inset space ~
30230 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
30233 \begin_layout Standard
30234 You can specify in the dialog tab
30238 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
30243 \begin_inset space ~
30247 \begin_inset space ~
30251 \begin_inset space ~
30256 option allows long links to be split;
30259 \begin_inset space ~
30263 \begin_inset space ~
30267 \begin_inset space ~
30275 \begin_inset space ~
30280 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
30283 \begin_inset space ~
30288 colors the different links.
30289 The default colors are:
30292 \begin_layout Labeling
30293 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30298 for hyperlinks and URLs
30301 \begin_layout Labeling
30302 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30310 \begin_layout Labeling
30311 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
30319 \begin_layout Standard
30320 but you can change these in the field
30325 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
30328 \begin_layout Standard
30331 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
30334 \begin_layout Standard
30339 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
30340 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
30341 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
30344 \begin_layout Standard
30349 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
30350 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
30351 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
30361 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
30362 when opening the PDF.
30364 \begin_inset space ~
30367 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
30368 \begin_inset space ~
30371 1 will only display the sections.
30374 \begin_layout Standard
30375 PDF properties are also used in this document.
30376 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
30382 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
30383 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30392 \begin_layout Section
30394 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30398 name "sec:TeX-Code"
30405 \begin_layout Subsection
30408 \begin_inset Index idx
30411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30421 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
30428 \begin_layout Standard
30429 As \SpecialChar LyX
30430 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
30431 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
30432 commands and constructs,
30435 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
30436 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
30437 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
30438 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30439 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
30440 cannot support all packages and
30444 \begin_layout Standard
30445 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
30446 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
30447 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
30451 Code box is created by the menu
30453 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30455 \begin_inset space ~
30460 or by the toolbar button
30473 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
30481 \begin_layout Standard
30482 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
30484 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
30486 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
30487 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30494 , you can write the command part
30500 in a \SpecialChar TeX
30501 Code box before the word and the closing brace
30505 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
30506 Code box behind the word.
30507 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
30508 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
30512 \begin_layout Standard
30513 \begin_inset Graphics
30514 filename clipart/ERT.png
30522 \begin_layout Standard
30526 \begin_layout Standard
30527 This is a line with a
30531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30554 \begin_layout Standard
30555 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30563 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30564 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
30565 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
30566 know that the command is finished.
30574 \begin_layout Subsection
30575 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30577 \begin_inset Argument 1
30580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
30588 \begin_inset Index idx
30591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30601 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30608 \begin_layout Standard
30609 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
30610 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30611 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
30612 uses in the background.
30613 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
30614 is based on commands, you can
30615 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30619 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30623 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
30624 any time if you know the right commands.
30625 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
30626 is the end of the day.
30627 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
30628 all caption labels bold.
30629 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
30631 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
30635 \begin_layout Standard
30636 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
30638 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30640 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30643 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30652 \begin_layout Standard
30653 As result you find that the package
30658 \begin_inset Index idx
30661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30663 -packages ! caption
30669 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
30671 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30674 \SpecialChar menuseparator
30678 \begin_inset space ~
30686 \begin_layout Standard
30691 usepackage[options]{package name}
30694 \begin_layout Standard
30695 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
30696 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
30697 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
30698 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
30701 \begin_layout Standard
30702 In your case the package name is
30707 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
30712 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
30713 So you add the command
30716 \begin_layout Standard
30721 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
30724 \begin_layout Standard
30725 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
30729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30730 For more commands provided by the
30734 package, have a look at its documentation,
30735 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30749 \begin_layout Standard
30750 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
30752 For example if you use a
30756 class, you don't need the package
30760 , you can instead write
30763 \begin_layout Standard
30768 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
30773 \begin_layout Standard
30774 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
30775 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
30776 documentation of the document class you want to use.
30783 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
30786 \begin_layout Standard
30787 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
30788 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
30790 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30791 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
30792 Code box as described in the previous
30796 \begin_layout Standard
30797 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
30798 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30801 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30803 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
30810 \begin_layout Standard
30811 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
30817 \begin_layout Standard
30821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30831 \begin_inset Note Note
30834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30835 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
30843 \begin_layout Left Header
30844 \begin_inset Argument 1
30847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30867 \begin_inset Note Note
30870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30871 defines the header line as described below
30879 \begin_layout Center Header
30880 \begin_inset Argument 1
30883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30892 \begin_layout Right Header
30893 \begin_inset Argument 1
30896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30917 \begin_layout Left Footer
30918 \begin_inset Argument 1
30921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30942 \begin_layout Center Footer
30943 \begin_inset Argument 1
30946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30958 \begin_inset Newline newline
30962 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
30968 \begin_layout Right Footer
30969 \begin_inset Argument 1
30972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30994 \begin_layout Section
30995 Customized Page Headers and Footers
30996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30998 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
31003 \begin_inset Index idx
31006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31007 Document ! Header/Footer line
31013 \begin_inset Index idx
31016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31025 \begin_layout Standard
31026 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
31030 \begin_inset space ~
31041 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31047 \begin_inset space ~
31053 As a second step add in the menu
31055 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31056 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31060 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31063 Custom Header/Footerlines
31064 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31068 This module offers the following 6
31069 \begin_inset space ~
31075 \begin_layout Description
31077 \begin_inset space ~
31081 \begin_inset space ~
31085 \begin_inset space ~
31089 \begin_inset space ~
31093 \begin_inset space ~
31099 \begin_layout Description
31101 \begin_inset space ~
31105 \begin_inset space ~
31109 \begin_inset space ~
31113 \begin_inset space ~
31117 \begin_inset space ~
31123 \begin_layout Standard
31124 for the different positions in the header/footer.
31127 \begin_layout Standard
31128 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
31129 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
31131 \begin_inset space ~
31135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31137 reference "fig:Page-layout"
31141 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
31144 \begin_layout Standard
31145 \begin_inset Float figure
31151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31154 \begin_inset Tabular
31155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
31156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
31157 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31159 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
31161 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31170 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
31173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31179 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31190 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31208 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31219 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
31222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31223 The normal text on the page goes here.
31224 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
31226 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
31227 the chapter, company logo but your can use almost anything, except of floats.
31232 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31241 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31252 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
31264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31270 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31281 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
31284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
31293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31299 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
31302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31317 \begin_inset Caption Standard
31319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31320 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31322 name "fig:Page-layout"
31326 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
31339 \begin_layout Standard
31340 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31348 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
31352 \begin_inset space ~
31357 is set to “Default”.
31358 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
31367 \begin_layout Subsection
31371 \begin_layout Standard
31372 To define your header line, add all three header styles.
31373 The things you add to the styles appear on odd numbered pages, the things
31374 in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
31375 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
31377 If you leave a style or its argument empty, nothing appears in the output.
31378 Defining the footer line works similarly.
31381 \begin_layout Standard
31382 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
31383 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
31387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31389 \begin_inset space ~
31397 \begin_layout Description
31400 thepage prints the current page number
31403 \begin_layout Description
31406 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
31409 \begin_layout Description
31412 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
31415 \begin_layout Description
31418 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
31419 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
31422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31426 \begin_inset Quotes prd
31429 because it usually goes in a left header.
31432 \begin_layout Description
31435 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
31436 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
31438 It is normally used in the right header.
31441 \begin_layout Subsection
31442 Default header/footer
31445 \begin_layout Standard
31446 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
31447 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
31448 footer has the page number.
31449 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
31450 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
31451 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
31454 \begin_inset space ~
31462 \begin_layout Subsection
31466 \begin_layout Standard
31467 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
31468 Some pages are different.
31469 The title page has a style of its own, and so does any page that starts
31470 a new part or chapter in your book.
31471 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
31472 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
31473 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
31476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31477 Header and footer decoration line
31480 \begin_layout Standard
31481 By default, you get a 0.4
31482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31485 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
31486 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
31498 in the following way:
31501 \begin_layout Standard
31508 headrulewidth}{thickness}
31511 \begin_layout Standard
31512 where thickness is a size in standard units like
31521 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
31522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31528 \begin_layout Standard
31529 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31531 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
31532 \begin_inset space ~
31536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31545 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31546 Several header/footer lines
31549 \begin_layout Standard
31550 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
31551 this by adding a normal line break in the style definition.
31552 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the one of one
31554 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31570 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31572 \begin_inset space ~
31580 \begin_layout Standard
31587 headheight}{height}
31590 \begin_layout Standard
31591 where height is a size in standard units.
31592 If you don't know which amount of space is needed for the height, define
31593 your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
31594 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31595 logfile with the menu
31597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31603 \begin_inset space ~
31608 to see if you can find a warning about the package
31613 \begin_inset Index idx
31616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31618 -packages ! fancyhdr
31624 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
31625 for your header/footer.
31628 \begin_layout Subsection
31632 \begin_layout Standard
31633 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
31634 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
31635 This example consists of the following definition:
31638 \begin_layout Description
31640 \begin_inset space ~
31649 , empty optional argument
31652 \begin_layout Description
31654 \begin_inset space ~
31657 Header empty, empty optional argument
31660 \begin_layout Description
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31671 in the optional argument
31674 \begin_layout Description
31676 \begin_inset space ~
31685 in the optional argument
31688 \begin_layout Description
31690 \begin_inset space ~
31703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31707 \begin_inset Newline newline
31711 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
31715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31718 in the optional argument
31721 \begin_layout Description
31723 \begin_inset space ~
31732 , empty optional argument
31735 \begin_layout Description
31738 headrulewidth set to 2
31739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31745 \begin_layout Standard
31746 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
31747 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
31753 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31762 \begin_layout Standard
31763 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
31769 \begin_layout Standard
31773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31777 pagestyle{headings}
31783 \begin_inset Note Note
31786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31787 switches back to page style with the default headings
31795 \begin_layout Section
31796 Previewing Snippets of your Document
31797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31799 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
31804 \begin_inset Index idx
31807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31814 \begin_inset Index idx
31817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31826 \begin_layout Standard
31828 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
31829 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
31830 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
31833 \begin_layout Subsection
31837 \begin_layout Standard
31838 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31844 \begin_inset Index idx
31847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31849 -packages ! preview-latex
31854 (on some systems named simply
31859 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31861 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31867 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31869 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
31877 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
31878 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31879 -package are automatically
31880 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
31884 \begin_layout Subsection
31888 \begin_layout Standard
31889 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
31890 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31892 activate the option
31895 \begin_inset space ~
31902 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31908 \begin_inset space ~
31912 \begin_inset space ~
31915 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
31922 \begin_inset space ~
31935 \begin_inset space ~
31940 is the multiplication factor for the size.
31943 \begin_layout Standard
31944 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
31949 \begin_inset space ~
31957 \begin_inset space ~
31965 \begin_layout Standard
31966 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
31967 and when you finish
31971 \begin_layout Standard
31972 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31980 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
31981 generated by activating the option
31984 \begin_inset space ~
31990 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
31998 \begin_layout Subsection
31999 Selected document parts
32002 \begin_layout Standard
32003 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
32004 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
32005 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
32006 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32008 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
32010 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32014 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
32015 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
32016 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
32019 \begin_layout Standard
32020 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32027 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32039 is explained in section
32041 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
32046 \begin_inset space ~
32056 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
32057 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
32058 the final rotated boxes,
32059 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
32060 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
32062 Here is the result:
32065 \begin_layout Standard
32066 \begin_inset Preview
32068 \begin_layout Standard
32073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32077 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
32083 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
32093 height_special "totalheight"
32098 backgroundcolor "none"
32101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32126 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
32132 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
32139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32154 \begin_layout Standard
32155 Previewing works also for colors.
32156 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32175 is explained in section
32182 \begin_inset space ~
32195 \begin_layout Standard
32196 \begin_inset Preview
32198 \begin_layout Standard
32202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32221 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
32226 This is text within a colored, framed box.
32230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32245 \begin_layout Standard
32246 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
32252 \begin_layout Standard
32253 If \SpecialChar LyX
32254 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
32255 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
32256 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
32257 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32258 packages in your document preamble that are required by
32259 the \SpecialChar TeX
32261 If \SpecialChar LyX
32262 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
32263 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
32265 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
32266 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
32267 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
32270 \begin_layout Subsection
32275 \begin_layout Standard
32276 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32277 source of the whole document or parts of it.
32280 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
32282 \begin_inset space ~
32287 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32289 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
32291 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
32292 's main window, then only this selection
32293 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
32294 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
32295 the source view window.
32300 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
32301 ; but note that if you have
32302 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
32304 not just the one which is open at the time.
32307 \begin_layout Section
32308 Advanced Find and Replace
32309 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32311 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
32316 \begin_inset Index idx
32319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32326 \begin_inset Index idx
32329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32338 \begin_layout Subsection
32342 \begin_layout Standard
32343 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
32344 allows for searching of complex,
32345 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
32347 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
32348 The key-features are:
32351 \begin_layout Itemize
32352 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
32353 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
32354 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
32358 \begin_layout Itemize
32359 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
32360 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
32361 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
32362 a section heading will only be found within section headings
32365 \begin_layout Itemize
32366 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
32367 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
32368 outside of mathematics environments
32371 \begin_layout Itemize
32372 Search may be widened to a specific
32377 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32381 \begin_inset space ~
32384 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
32385 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
32392 \begin_layout Itemize
32393 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
32394 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
32395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32399 \begin_inset space ~
32402 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
32405 \begin_layout Subsection
32409 \begin_layout Standard
32410 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
32412 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
32425 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
32428 ) or the toolbar button
32431 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
32437 Advanced Find and Replace
32442 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32446 \begin_layout Standard
32452 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
32456 \begin_inset space ~
32461 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
32464 arg "paragraph-break"
32468 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
32469 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
32473 arg "paragraph-break"
32476 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
32480 searches backwards.
32483 \begin_layout Standard
32487 \begin_inset space ~
32492 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
32501 \begin_inset space ~
32506 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
32509 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32510 Searching for mathematics
32513 \begin_layout Standard
32514 Mathematical formulas, such as
32515 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
32518 or something more complex like
32519 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
32522 , may be searched for by typing them in the
32527 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
32528 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
32529 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
32530 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
32536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32540 \begin_layout Standard
32541 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
32542 This is done by switching to the
32546 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
32551 This way, entering in the
32558 \begin_layout Itemize
32559 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
32560 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
32563 \begin_layout Itemize
32564 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
32565 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
32568 \begin_layout Itemize
32569 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
32570 of it only within section headings.
32571 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
32572 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
32576 \begin_layout Itemize
32577 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
32578 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
32581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32585 \begin_layout Standard
32586 The entries made in the
32590 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
32593 \begin_inset space ~
32599 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
32603 button or alternatively press
32606 arg "paragraph-break"
32613 while the cursor is in the
32616 \begin_inset space ~
32624 \begin_layout Standard
32625 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
32627 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
32631 \begin_layout Itemize
32632 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
32633 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
32634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32641 with its typewriter version
32642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32656 \begin_layout Itemize
32657 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
32659 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32663 \begin_inset Formula $R$
32667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32675 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
32679 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32682 (you may want to enable the
32685 \begin_inset space ~
32693 \begin_inset space ~
32698 options and disable the
32706 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
32707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32711 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32714 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
32715 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
32719 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
32722 , or occurrences of
32723 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
32727 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
32733 \begin_layout Subsection
32737 \begin_layout Standard
32738 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
32742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32743 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
32745 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32747 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
32756 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
32762 This is done with the context menu
32764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32765 Insert Regular Expression
32767 while the cursor is in the
32772 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
32773 expression matching rules
32777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32778 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
32781 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32785 \begin_inset space ~
32788 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
32789 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
32795 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
32796 same text in the document.
32797 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
32798 Examples of using such a feature may be:
32801 \begin_layout Enumerate
32802 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
32807 editor the fraction
32808 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
32812 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32815 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
32816 fractions with the given denominator.
32819 \begin_layout Enumerate
32820 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
32832 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32837 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
32838 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
32839 Also, by inserting a
32840 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
32843 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
32844 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
32847 \begin_layout Standard
32848 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
32849 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
32850 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32853 , and referring back to them through
32854 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32858 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
32862 For example, try searching with the regexp
32863 \begin_inset Newline newline
32866 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
32869 \begin_inset Newline newline
32872 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
32875 \begin_layout Standard
32876 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
32879 \begin_layout Standard
32880 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32888 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
32889 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
32890 sub-expressions is absolute.
32892 \begin_inset space ~
32896 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
32899 always refers to the first occurrence of
32900 \begin_inset Formula $()$
32903 in all entered regexps.
32911 \begin_layout Section
32913 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32915 name "sec:Spellchecking"
32920 \begin_inset Index idx
32923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32932 \begin_layout Standard
32934 has a built-in spell checker.
32937 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32944 key or the toolbar button
32947 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
32950 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
32951 beginning of the currently selected text.
32952 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
32953 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
32954 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
32955 scrolled so that it is visible.
32956 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
32957 n, if any could be found.
32958 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
32962 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
32963 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
32966 \begin_layout Standard
32967 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
32970 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32974 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
32975 a different one at the top of the dialog.
32977 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
32978 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
32981 \begin_inset space ~
32989 arg "dialog-show character"
32992 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
32994 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
32997 \begin_layout Standard
32998 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
32999 can be downloaded from here:
33000 \begin_inset Newline newline
33004 \begin_inset Flex URL
33007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33009 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
33015 \begin_inset Newline newline
33019 \begin_inset space ~
33022 files for each language.
33023 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
33024 \begin_inset space ~
33027 files into \SpecialChar LyX
33028 's installation subfolder
33036 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33038 \begin_inset Newline newline
33041 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
33042 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
33043 but in most cases these are
33059 is the language code.
33062 \begin_layout Subsection
33066 \begin_layout Standard
33069 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33070 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33072 \begin_inset space ~
33075 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33078 you can set the following things:
33081 \begin_layout Description
33083 \begin_inset space ~
33086 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
33087 should use for spell checking.
33088 Depending on your platform,
33102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33103 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
33104 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
33119 \begin_inset space ~
33122 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
33125 \begin_layout Description
33127 \begin_inset space ~
33130 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
33131 will always use the given language
33132 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
33135 \begin_layout Description
33137 \begin_inset space ~
33140 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
33142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33146 \begin_inset space \space{}
33150 This should normally not be needed.
33153 \begin_layout Description
33155 \begin_inset space ~
33159 \begin_inset space ~
33162 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
33164 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33174 \begin_layout Description
33176 \begin_inset space ~
33179 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
33180 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
33181 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
33182 appear in a context menu.
33183 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
33187 \begin_layout Description
33189 \begin_inset space ~
33193 \begin_inset space ~
33197 \begin_inset space ~
33200 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
33204 \begin_layout Section
33206 \begin_inset Index idx
33209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33218 name "sec:Thesaurus"
33225 \begin_layout Standard
33227 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
33228 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
33237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33238 \begin_inset CommandInset href
33240 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
33249 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
33251 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
33252 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
33253 which are available for many languages.
33256 \begin_layout Standard
33257 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
33258 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
33262 \begin_layout Subsection
33263 Setting up the thesaurus
33266 \begin_layout Standard
33275 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
33279 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
33284 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
33286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33290 \begin_inset space ~
33298 For instance, the US English files are named:
33301 \begin_layout Itemize
33305 \begin_layout Itemize
33309 \begin_layout Standard
33318 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
33319 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
33322 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33323 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33324 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33326 \begin_inset space ~
33331 ) to the path where they are installed.
33335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33336 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
33337 ies, typical locations are
33343 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
33347 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
33351 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
33354 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
33360 LibreOffice-<Version>
33367 On the Mac, the default location is
33369 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
33370 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33371 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
33372 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
33373 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33374 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
33382 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
33383 during the \SpecialChar LyX
33384 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
33388 \begin_layout Standard
33389 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
33390 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
33394 \begin_layout Itemize
33395 \begin_inset Flex URL
33398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33400 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
33408 \begin_layout Standard
33409 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
33410 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
33412 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33413 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33414 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33416 \begin_inset space ~
33421 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
33423 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
33424 and point \SpecialChar LyX
33428 \begin_layout Standard
33429 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
33431 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
33434 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
33440 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
33443 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
33444 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
33446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33452 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33453 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33454 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
33456 \begin_inset space ~
33461 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
33464 \begin_layout Subsection
33465 Using the thesaurus
33468 \begin_layout Standard
33469 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
33471 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33474 or the toolbar button
33477 arg "thesaurus-entry"
33480 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
33482 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
33484 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
33485 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
33486 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
33495 ), related terms (such as
33498 \begin_inset space ~
33507 ), compounds (such as
33510 \begin_inset space ~
33519 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
33528 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
33531 \begin_layout Standard
33532 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
33533 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
33537 \begin_layout Standard
33538 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
33539 the dictionary, such as the above
33543 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
33544 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33548 \begin_inset space \space{}
33551 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
33552 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
33553 For example, looking up the word form
33557 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
33562 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
33563 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33567 \begin_inset space \space{}
33578 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
33579 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
33580 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
33583 \begin_layout Section
33585 \begin_inset Index idx
33588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33595 \begin_inset Index idx
33598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33599 Document ! Change Tracking
33605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33607 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
33614 \begin_layout Standard
33615 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
33616 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
33617 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
33618 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
33620 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33622 \begin_inset space ~
33625 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33627 \begin_inset space ~
33635 \begin_layout Standard
33636 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
33650 The color depends on the author that made the change.
33651 You can change the color in
33653 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33654 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
33656 \begin_inset space ~
33660 \begin_inset space ~
33665 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33671 \begin_inset Index idx
33674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33675 Color ! Change tracking
33680 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
33681 's status bar when the
33682 cursor is in changed text.
33683 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
33686 arg "changes-merge"
33692 \begin_layout Standard
33693 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
33695 \begin_inset Index idx
33698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33707 \begin_layout Standard
33708 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33714 \begin_layout Standard
33715 \begin_inset Graphics
33716 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
33724 \begin_layout Standard
33725 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33731 \begin_layout Standard
33732 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
33735 \begin_layout Standard
33736 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
33742 \begin_layout Standard
33743 \begin_inset Tabular
33744 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
33745 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
33746 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33747 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
33748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33757 arg "changes-track"
33765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33771 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33773 \begin_inset space ~
33776 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33778 \begin_inset space ~
33787 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33796 arg "changes-output"
33804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33810 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33812 \begin_inset space ~
33815 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33817 \begin_inset space ~
33821 \begin_inset space ~
33825 \begin_inset space ~
33834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33855 Jumps to the next change
33861 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33862 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33870 arg "change-accept"
33878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33884 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33886 \begin_inset space ~
33889 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33891 \begin_inset space ~
33900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33909 arg "change-reject"
33917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33925 \begin_inset space ~
33928 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33930 \begin_inset space ~
33939 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33948 arg "changes-merge"
33956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33964 \begin_inset space ~
33967 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
33969 \begin_inset space ~
33978 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
33979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33987 arg "all-changes-accept"
33995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34001 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34003 \begin_inset space ~
34006 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34008 \begin_inset space ~
34012 \begin_inset space ~
34021 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34030 arg "all-changes-reject"
34038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34046 \begin_inset space ~
34049 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
34051 \begin_inset space ~
34055 \begin_inset space ~
34064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34088 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
34090 \begin_inset space ~
34099 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
34100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
34119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34122 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
34124 \begin_inset space ~
34140 \begin_layout Standard
34141 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
34147 \begin_layout Standard
34148 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
34168 \begin_layout Standard
34169 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
34170 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
34171 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
34172 the next change after the current cursor position.
34173 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
34174 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
34175 step to the next change.
34176 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
34179 \begin_layout Standard
34180 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
34181 to describe a change.
34184 \begin_layout Standard
34185 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34191 \begin_inset Index idx
34194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34196 -packages ! dvipost
34202 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34204 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34210 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34214 \begin_layout Section
34215 Comparison of Documents
34216 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34218 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
34223 \begin_inset Index idx
34226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34227 Comparison of documents
34235 \begin_layout Standard
34236 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
34239 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34243 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
34244 file with change tracking enabled showing the
34246 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
34248 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
34252 \begin_inset space ~
34256 \begin_inset space ~
34260 \begin_inset space ~
34269 \begin_inset space ~
34273 \begin_inset space ~
34277 \begin_inset space ~
34281 \begin_inset space ~
34285 \begin_inset space ~
34289 \begin_inset space ~
34294 enables the change tracking option
34297 \begin_inset space ~
34301 \begin_inset space ~
34305 \begin_inset space ~
34310 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
34313 \begin_layout Section
34314 International Support
34315 \begin_inset Index idx
34318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34319 International support
34327 \begin_layout Standard
34328 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
34329 with any language you want.
34330 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
34331 up \SpecialChar LyX
34333 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34335 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
34342 \begin_layout Standard
34343 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
34344 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
34345 \begin_inset space ~
34349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34351 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
34358 \begin_layout Subsection
34360 \begin_inset Index idx
34363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34370 \begin_inset Index idx
34373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34374 Document ! Settings
34380 \begin_inset Index idx
34383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34384 Document ! Language
34392 \begin_layout Standard
34395 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34396 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34399 dialog lets you set
34401 the language, the quote style and character encoding
34406 \begin_layout Standard
34411 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
34416 \begin_inset space ~
34421 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
34422 For details about the different encoding options see section
34423 \begin_inset space ~
34427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34429 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
34436 \begin_layout Subsection
34437 Keyboard mapping configuration
34438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34440 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
34447 \begin_layout Standard
34448 If you have for example a U.
34449 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34452 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
34453 can use an alternate keymap.
34454 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
34459 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34460 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
34461 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
34464 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
34465 \begin_inset space ~
34469 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34471 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
34476 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
34477 which one you want to use.
34480 \begin_layout Standard
34481 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
34482 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
34483 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
34484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34487 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
34488 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
34489 one to support the characters you want.
34490 This and many other customizations are explained in the
34497 \begin_layout Chapter
34500 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34502 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
34509 \begin_layout Standard
34510 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
34511 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
34512 topic inside the user's guide.
34515 \begin_layout Section
34517 \begin_inset Index idx
34520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34529 \begin_layout Standard
34534 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
34537 \begin_layout Subsection
34541 \begin_layout Standard
34542 Creates a new document.
34545 \begin_layout Subsection
34549 \begin_layout Standard
34550 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
34551 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
34552 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
34555 \begin_layout Subsection
34559 \begin_layout Standard
34563 \begin_layout Subsection
34567 \begin_layout Standard
34568 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
34569 Click there on a file to open it.
34572 \begin_layout Subsection
34576 \begin_layout Standard
34577 Closes the current document.
34580 \begin_layout Subsection
34584 \begin_layout Standard
34585 Closes all opened documents.
34588 \begin_layout Subsection
34592 \begin_layout Standard
34593 Saves the actual document.
34596 \begin_layout Subsection
34600 \begin_layout Standard
34601 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
34604 \begin_layout Subsection
34608 \begin_layout Standard
34609 Saves all opened documents.
34612 \begin_layout Subsection
34616 \begin_layout Standard
34617 Reloads the actual document from disk.
34620 \begin_layout Subsection
34624 \begin_layout Standard
34625 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
34626 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
34627 It is described in the section
34629 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
34634 Additional Features
34639 \begin_layout Subsection
34643 \begin_layout Standard
34644 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
34645 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
34647 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
34648 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
34652 \begin_layout Standard
34653 When using the menu entry
34656 \begin_inset space ~
34661 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
34665 \begin_inset space ~
34669 \begin_inset space ~
34673 \begin_inset space ~
34678 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
34679 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
34682 \begin_layout Subsection
34684 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34686 name "subsec:Export"
34693 \begin_layout Standard
34694 You can export your document to various file formats.
34695 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
34697 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
34698 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
34699 during its configuration.
34702 \begin_layout Standard
34703 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
34705 \begin_inset space ~
34709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34711 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
34718 \begin_layout Description
34724 \begin_inset space ~
34727 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
34729 \begin_inset space ~
34732 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
34733 \begin_inset Newline newline
34736 Since \SpecialChar LyX
34737 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
34741 \begin_layout Description
34742 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
34748 \begin_layout Description
34750 \begin_inset space ~
34753 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
34759 \begin_layout Description
34760 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
34761 's native DVI-format.
34762 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
34763 files paths or file names in your document.
34765 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
34772 \begin_layout Description
34773 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
34774 in files paths or file names
34777 \begin_layout Description
34779 \begin_inset space ~
34786 ) DVI-format using the program
34788 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34791 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
34795 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34803 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
34811 \begin_layout Description
34813 \begin_inset space ~
34816 (cropped) the same as
34820 but with cropped page margins.
34823 \begin_layout Description
34825 \begin_inset space ~
34828 Dot text file with code in the programming language
34832 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
34837 \begin_layout Description
34841 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34849 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
34857 \begin_layout Description
34859 \begin_inset space ~
34863 \begin_inset space ~
34866 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
34870 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
34878 \begin_layout Description
34882 \begin_inset space ~
34891 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34892 source that is compilable with the program
34894 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
34898 \begin_layout Description
34902 \begin_inset space ~
34907 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34908 source, additionally all images used in the document
34909 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
34913 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
34916 \begin_layout Description
34920 \begin_inset space ~
34925 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34926 source code, additionally all images used in the document
34927 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
34935 \begin_layout Description
34939 \begin_inset space ~
34948 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34949 source that is compilable with the program
34955 \begin_layout Description
34957 \begin_inset space ~
34961 \begin_inset space ~
34968 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34969 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
34975 \begin_layout Description
34977 \begin_inset space ~
34980 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
34981 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
34983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34987 \begin_inset space \space{}
34992 \begin_inset space ~
34996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35008 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35011 represent the version number)
35014 \begin_layout Description
35016 \begin_inset space ~
35020 \begin_inset space ~
35023 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
35024 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
35025 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
35029 \begin_layout Description
35030 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
35031 's internal XHTML engine
35034 \begin_layout Description
35036 \begin_inset space ~
35040 \begin_inset space ~
35044 \begin_inset space ~
35048 \begin_inset space ~
35051 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
35056 For the conversion the program
35065 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35068 \begin_layout Description
35069 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
35074 \begin_layout Description
35076 \begin_inset space ~
35079 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
35081 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
35084 For the conversion the program
35093 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35096 \begin_layout Description
35098 \begin_inset space ~
35101 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
35102 For the conversion the program
35111 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
35114 \begin_layout Description
35116 \begin_inset space ~
35119 (cropped) the same as
35122 \begin_inset space ~
35127 but with cropped page margins
35130 \begin_layout Description
35134 \begin_inset space ~
35139 PDF-format using the program
35143 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35146 \begin_layout Description
35150 \begin_inset space ~
35154 \begin_inset space ~
35162 \begin_inset space ~
35167 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
35168 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35172 \begin_inset space \space{}
35175 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
35179 \begin_layout Description
35183 \begin_inset space ~
35188 PDF-format using the program
35190 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
35193 , produces PDF-files directly
35196 \begin_layout Description
35200 \begin_inset space ~
35205 PDF-format using the program
35209 , produces PDF-files directly
35212 \begin_layout Description
35216 \begin_inset space ~
35221 PDF-format using the program
35225 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
35228 \begin_layout Description
35232 \begin_inset space ~
35237 PDF-format using the program
35242 , produces PDF-files directly
35245 \begin_layout Description
35249 \begin_inset space ~
35257 \begin_layout Description
35261 \begin_inset space ~
35265 \begin_inset space ~
35270 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
35271 and then exported as text using the program
35276 \begin_layout Description
35281 PostScript format using the program
35289 options see section
35290 \begin_inset space ~
35294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35296 reference "subsec:General-output"
35303 \begin_layout Description
35304 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35305 source and also code in the statistical programming
35319 it is possible to use
35323 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
35327 \begin_layout Standard
35328 If one of the menu entries
35335 \begin_inset space ~
35344 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
35346 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
35348 \begin_inset space ~
35352 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35354 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
35359 \begin_inset Index idx
35362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35363 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
35372 \begin_layout Subsection
35376 \begin_layout Standard
35377 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
35378 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
35381 \begin_inset space ~
35385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35387 reference "sec:Paths"
35392 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
35401 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
35402 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
35403 's preferences as described in section
35404 \begin_inset space ~
35408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35410 reference "subsec:Converters"
35417 \begin_layout Subsection
35418 New and Close Window
35421 \begin_layout Standard
35422 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
35426 \begin_layout Subsection
35430 \begin_layout Standard
35431 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
35434 \begin_layout Section
35436 \begin_inset Index idx
35439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35448 \begin_layout Subsection
35452 \begin_layout Standard
35453 Described in section
35454 \begin_inset space ~
35458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35460 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
35467 \begin_layout Subsection
35468 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
35471 \begin_layout Standard
35472 Described in section
35473 \begin_inset space ~
35477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35479 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35486 \begin_layout Subsection
35490 \begin_layout Standard
35491 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
35492 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
35495 \begin_layout Subsection
35499 \begin_layout Standard
35500 Selects the whole document.
35503 \begin_layout Subsection
35504 Find & Replace (Quick)
35507 \begin_layout Standard
35508 Described in section
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35515 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
35522 \begin_layout Subsection
35523 Find & Replace (Advanced)
35526 \begin_layout Standard
35527 Described in section
35528 \begin_inset space ~
35532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35534 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
35541 \begin_layout Subsection
35542 Move Paragraph Up/Down
35545 \begin_layout Standard
35546 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
35550 \begin_layout Subsection
35554 \begin_layout Standard
35555 Described in section
35556 \begin_inset space ~
35560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35562 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
35569 \begin_layout Subsection
35571 \begin_inset Index idx
35574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35575 Paragraph ! Settings
35583 \begin_layout Standard
35584 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
35585 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35590 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
35591 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
35597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35598 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35608 \begin_layout Subsection
35609 Table and Rows & Columns
35612 \begin_layout Standard
35613 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
35614 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
35615 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
35618 \begin_layout Subsection
35622 \begin_layout Standard
35623 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
35624 It will dissolve this inset.
35625 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
35629 \begin_layout Subsection
35633 \begin_layout Standard
35634 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
35635 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
35638 \begin_layout Subsection
35639 Increase/Decrease List Depth
35642 \begin_layout Standard
35643 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
35645 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
35646 \begin_inset space ~
35650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35652 reference "sec:Nesting"
35657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35659 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
35666 \begin_layout Subsection
35669 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
35672 \begin_layout Standard
35673 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
35674 nts of the same type.
35676 \begin_inset space ~
35680 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35682 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
35686 for an explanation.
35689 \begin_layout Section
35691 \begin_inset Index idx
35694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35703 \begin_layout Standard
35704 At the bottom of the
35708 menu the opened documents are listed.
35711 \begin_layout Subsection
35712 Open/Close all Insets
35715 \begin_layout Standard
35716 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
35719 \begin_layout Subsection
35720 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
35723 \begin_layout Standard
35724 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
35727 \begin_layout Standard
35728 Math macros are described in the
35735 \begin_layout Subsection
35739 \begin_layout Standard
35740 Shows the outline window as described in sections
35741 \begin_inset space ~
35745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35747 reference "sec:Navigating"
35752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35754 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
35761 \begin_layout Subsection
35765 \begin_layout Standard
35766 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
35768 \begin_inset space ~
35772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35774 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
35781 \begin_layout Subsection
35785 \begin_layout Standard
35786 Opens a window showing console messages.
35787 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
35789 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35792 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
35793 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
35794 is processing the document.
35797 \begin_layout Subsection
35799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35801 name "subsec:Toolbars"
35806 \begin_inset Index idx
35809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35818 \begin_layout Standard
35819 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
35820 All toolbars and the
35823 \begin_inset space ~
35828 can be turned on and off.
35833 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
35845 \begin_inset space ~
35857 \begin_inset space ~
35862 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
35866 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
35873 \begin_layout Standard
35878 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
35882 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
35883 or when a certain feature is enabled.
35884 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
35885 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
35886 is inside a formula or table respectively.
35889 \begin_layout Standard
35891 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
35892 \begin_inset space ~
35896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35898 reference "sec:Toolbars"
35905 \begin_layout Subsection
35909 \begin_layout Standard
35913 \begin_inset space ~
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35921 \begin_inset space ~
35925 \begin_inset space ~
35929 \begin_inset space ~
35933 \begin_inset space ~
35938 will split \SpecialChar LyX
35939 's main window vertically while
35942 \begin_inset space ~
35946 \begin_inset space ~
35950 \begin_inset space ~
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35958 \begin_inset space ~
35962 \begin_inset space ~
35967 will split it horizontally.
35968 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
35969 to view the same document, but at different positions.
35970 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
35971 three or more documents at the same time.
35972 To close a split view, use the menu
35975 \begin_inset space ~
35979 \begin_inset space ~
35987 \begin_layout Subsection
35991 \begin_layout Standard
35992 Closes a split view.
35995 \begin_layout Subsection
35999 \begin_layout Standard
36000 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
36001 so that you will see nothing but your text.
36002 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
36003 's main window fullscreen.
36004 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
36005 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
36008 \begin_layout Section
36010 \begin_inset Index idx
36013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36022 \begin_layout Subsection
36026 \begin_layout Standard
36027 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
36028 \begin_inset space ~
36032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36034 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
36045 \begin_layout Subsection
36047 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36049 name "subsec:Special-Character"
36056 \begin_layout Standard
36057 Here you can insert the following characters:
36060 \begin_layout Description
36065 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
36068 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
36069 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36070 -packages you have installed.
36071 You can get a complete display by checking
36074 \begin_inset space ~
36080 \begin_inset Newline newline
36084 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36092 Not all characters will be visible in the
36096 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
36097 dialog (see section
36098 \begin_inset space ~
36102 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36104 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
36108 ) can display every character.
36116 \begin_layout Description
36117 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
36121 \begin_layout Description
36123 \begin_inset space ~
36127 \begin_inset space ~
36130 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
36131 \begin_inset space ~
36135 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36137 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
36144 \begin_layout Description
36146 \begin_inset space ~
36149 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
36152 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36153 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36159 \begin_layout Description
36161 \begin_inset space ~
36164 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
36167 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36168 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36174 \begin_layout Description
36176 \begin_inset space ~
36179 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
36183 \begin_layout Description
36185 \begin_inset space ~
36188 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
36192 \begin_layout Description
36194 \begin_inset space ~
36197 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
36203 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36209 \begin_layout Description
36211 \begin_inset space ~
36214 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
36218 \begin_layout Description
36220 \begin_inset space ~
36224 \begin_inset Index idx
36227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36234 \begin_inset Index idx
36237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36238 Language ! Phonetic symbols
36243 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
36244 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
36246 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36252 \begin_inset Index idx
36255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36263 \begin_inset Newline newline
36266 More information about this feature can be found in the
36272 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
36278 \begin_layout Description
36279 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
36281 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
36282 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
36286 \begin_layout Subsection
36290 \begin_layout Standard
36291 Opens a submenu with the following options:
36294 \begin_layout Description
36295 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
36296 \begin_inset script superscript
36298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36307 \begin_layout Description
36308 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
36309 \begin_inset script subscript
36311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36320 \begin_layout Description
36322 \begin_inset space ~
36325 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
36326 \begin_inset space ~
36330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36332 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
36339 \begin_layout Description
36341 \begin_inset space ~
36344 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36351 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
36358 \begin_layout Description
36360 \begin_inset space ~
36363 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
36364 \begin_inset space ~
36368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36370 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
36377 \begin_layout Description
36379 \begin_inset space ~
36382 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
36384 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36388 \begin_inset space \space{}
36391 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
36392 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
36398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36401 To insert a fraction use the command
36406 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
36410 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
36416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36419 The visible space is hereby the character before the
36426 \begin_layout Description
36428 \begin_inset space ~
36431 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
36432 \begin_inset space ~
36436 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36438 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
36445 \begin_layout Description
36447 \begin_inset space ~
36450 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36457 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
36464 \begin_layout Description
36466 \begin_inset space ~
36469 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
36470 \begin_inset space ~
36474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36476 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
36483 \begin_layout Description
36484 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
36485 \begin_inset space ~
36489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36491 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
36498 \begin_layout Description
36500 \begin_inset space ~
36503 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
36504 \begin_inset space ~
36508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36510 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
36517 \begin_layout Description
36519 \begin_inset space ~
36522 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
36523 \begin_inset space ~
36527 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36529 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
36536 \begin_layout Description
36538 \begin_inset space ~
36542 \begin_inset space ~
36545 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
36546 \begin_inset space ~
36550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36552 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36559 \begin_layout Description
36561 \begin_inset space ~
36564 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
36565 as described in section
36566 \begin_inset space ~
36570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36572 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
36579 \begin_layout Description
36581 \begin_inset space ~
36584 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
36585 \begin_inset space ~
36589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36591 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36598 \begin_layout Description
36600 \begin_inset space ~
36603 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
36604 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36612 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
36619 \begin_layout Description
36621 \begin_inset space ~
36624 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
36625 \begin_inset space ~
36629 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36631 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36638 \begin_layout Description
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36644 \begin_inset space ~
36647 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36654 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
36661 \begin_layout Subsection
36665 \begin_layout Standard
36666 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
36670 \begin_inset space ~
36691 are described in section
36692 \begin_inset space ~
36696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36698 reference "sec:toc"
36707 is described in section
36708 \begin_inset space ~
36712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36714 reference "sec:Index"
36722 is described in section
36723 \begin_inset space ~
36727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36729 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
36735 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
36738 is described in section
36739 \begin_inset space ~
36743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36745 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
36752 \begin_layout Subsection
36756 \begin_layout Standard
36757 To insert floats, as described in section
36758 \begin_inset space ~
36762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36764 reference "sec:Floats"
36768 and in detail the chapter
36775 \begin_inset space ~
36783 \begin_layout Subsection
36787 \begin_layout Standard
36788 To insert notes, described in section
36789 \begin_inset space ~
36793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36795 reference "sec:Notes"
36802 \begin_layout Subsection
36806 \begin_layout Standard
36807 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
36809 Branches are described in section
36810 \begin_inset space ~
36814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36816 reference "sec:Branches"
36823 \begin_layout Subsection
36827 \begin_layout Standard
36828 Inserts document class-specific insets.
36829 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
36831 An example is the document class
36832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36839 with three custom insets.
36842 Flex insets and InsetLayout
36846 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
36852 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
36855 \begin_layout Subsection
36857 \begin_inset Index idx
36860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36869 \begin_layout Standard
36870 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
36872 For more information see chapter
36874 External Document Parts
36877 \begin_inset space ~
36883 \begin_layout Subsection
36885 \begin_inset Index idx
36888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36897 \begin_layout Standard
36898 Inserts a box in a certain style.
36899 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
36906 \begin_inset space ~
36914 \begin_layout Subsection
36918 \begin_layout Standard
36923 dialog as described in section
36924 \begin_inset space ~
36928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36930 reference "sec:Bibliography"
36937 \begin_layout Subsection
36941 \begin_layout Standard
36946 as described in section
36947 \begin_inset space ~
36951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36953 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36960 \begin_layout Subsection
36964 \begin_layout Standard
36969 as described in section
36970 \begin_inset space ~
36974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36976 reference "sec:Cross-References"
36983 \begin_layout Subsection
36985 \begin_inset Index idx
36988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36995 \begin_inset Index idx
36998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36999 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
37007 \begin_layout Standard
37008 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
37009 Floats are described in section
37010 \begin_inset space ~
37014 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37016 reference "sec:Floats"
37020 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
37022 Multi-page Captions
37027 \begin_inset space ~
37035 \begin_layout Subsection
37039 \begin_layout Standard
37040 Inserts an index entry as described in section
37041 \begin_inset space ~
37045 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37047 reference "sec:Index"
37054 \begin_layout Subsection
37058 \begin_layout Standard
37059 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
37060 \begin_inset space ~
37064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37066 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
37073 \begin_layout Subsection
37077 \begin_layout Standard
37078 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
37079 Tables are described in section
37080 \begin_inset space ~
37084 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37086 reference "sec:Tables"
37090 and in detail in the chapter
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37105 \begin_layout Subsection
37109 \begin_layout Standard
37115 Graphics are described in section
37116 \begin_inset space ~
37120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37122 reference "sec:Graphics"
37129 \begin_layout Subsection
37133 \begin_layout Standard
37134 Inserts a URL as described in section
37135 \begin_inset space ~
37139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37141 reference "subsec:URLs"
37148 \begin_layout Subsection
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37153 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
37154 \begin_inset space ~
37158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37160 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
37167 \begin_layout Subsection
37171 \begin_layout Standard
37172 Inserts a footnote as described in section
37173 \begin_inset space ~
37177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37179 reference "sec:Footnotes"
37186 \begin_layout Subsection
37190 \begin_layout Standard
37191 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
37192 \begin_inset space ~
37196 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37198 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
37205 \begin_layout Subsection
37209 \begin_layout Standard
37210 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
37211 title or caption of a float.
37212 Inserts a short title as described in section
37213 \begin_inset space ~
37217 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37219 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
37226 \begin_layout Subsection
37231 \begin_layout Standard
37232 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
37233 Code box as described in section
37234 \begin_inset space ~
37238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37240 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
37247 \begin_layout Subsection
37249 \begin_inset Index idx
37252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37261 \begin_layout Standard
37262 Inserts a program listings box.
37263 Program listings are explained in the chapter
37265 Program Code Listings
37270 \begin_inset space ~
37278 \begin_layout Subsection
37282 \begin_layout Standard
37283 Inserts the actual date.
37284 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
37288 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
37296 \begin_inset space ~
37304 \begin_layout Subsection
37308 \begin_layout Standard
37309 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
37310 \begin_inset space ~
37314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37316 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37323 \begin_layout Section
37325 \begin_inset Index idx
37328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37337 \begin_layout Standard
37338 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
37339 \begin_inset space ~
37342 of the current document.
37343 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
37346 \begin_layout Subsection
37350 \begin_layout Standard
37351 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
37352 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
37353 to jump, for example, between section
37354 \begin_inset space ~
37358 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
37359 \begin_inset space ~
37362 2.5 and use the submenu
37365 \begin_inset space ~
37369 \begin_inset space ~
37376 \begin_inset space ~
37382 \begin_inset space ~
37386 \begin_inset space ~
37392 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
37396 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
37402 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
37405 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
37408 \begin_layout Standard
37409 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
37413 \begin_inset space ~
37418 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
37421 \begin_inset space ~
37426 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
37429 \begin_layout Subsection
37430 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
37433 \begin_layout Standard
37434 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
37438 \begin_layout Subsection
37442 \begin_layout Standard
37443 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
37444 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
37445 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
37449 \begin_inset space ~
37453 \begin_inset space ~
37461 \begin_layout Subsection
37465 \begin_layout Standard
37466 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
37469 The \SpecialChar LyX
37470 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
37472 \begin_inset space ~
37480 \begin_inset space ~
37485 manual for a detailed description.
37488 \begin_layout Section
37490 \begin_inset Index idx
37493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37502 \begin_layout Subsection
37506 \begin_layout Standard
37507 Change Tracking is described in section
37508 \begin_inset space ~
37512 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37514 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
37521 \begin_layout Subsection
37529 \begin_layout Standard
37530 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
37531 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
37532 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37534 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
37535 to the clipboard or update the view.
37536 \begin_inset Newline newline
37539 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37543 \begin_layout Standard
37546 Open Containing Directory
37548 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
37549 's temporary folder for the document.
37550 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
37551 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
37552 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
37553 For example some journals require to send the
37557 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37561 \begin_layout Subsection
37562 Start Appendix Here
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37566 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
37567 as described in section
37568 \begin_inset space ~
37572 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37574 reference "sec:Appendices"
37581 \begin_layout Subsection
37583 \begin_inset space ~
37589 \begin_layout Standard
37590 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
37591 default output format for the document (menu
37593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37594 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37595 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37597 \begin_inset space ~
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37607 \begin_inset space ~
37611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37613 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37617 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
37620 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37621 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37623 \begin_inset space ~
37626 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37628 \begin_inset space ~
37631 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37637 \begin_inset space ~
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37649 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37653 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
37654 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37656 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37657 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37659 \begin_inset space ~
37662 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37664 \begin_inset space ~
37667 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37671 \begin_inset space ~
37675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37677 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37682 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37683 when it is first configured.
37684 The default output format is
37687 \begin_inset space ~
37695 \begin_layout Subsection
37696 View (Other Formats)
37699 \begin_layout Standard
37700 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
37701 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
37702 actual document with an external program.
37703 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
37704 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37705 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
37707 All possible formats are listed in section
37708 \begin_inset space ~
37712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37714 reference "subsec:Export"
37719 You should at least see the menu entry
37724 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37726 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37728 \begin_inset space ~
37732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37734 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37739 \begin_inset Index idx
37742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37743 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37752 \begin_layout Standard
37753 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
37754 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
37756 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37757 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37759 \begin_inset space ~
37762 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37764 \begin_inset space ~
37767 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37771 \begin_inset space ~
37775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37777 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37782 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
37783 when it is first configured.
37786 \begin_layout Subsection
37788 \begin_inset space ~
37794 \begin_layout Standard
37795 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
37796 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
37799 \begin_layout Subsection
37800 Update (Other Formats)
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
37805 your document without opening a new viewer window.
37808 \begin_layout Subsection
37809 View Master Document
37812 \begin_layout Standard
37813 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37834 manual for more information on this topic).
37835 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
37836 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
37840 \begin_inset space ~
37844 \begin_inset space ~
37849 generates the output of the whole book, while
37853 will just output the chapter alone.
37856 \begin_layout Standard
37857 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37858 in the document settings (menu
37860 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37861 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37862 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37864 \begin_inset space ~
37868 \begin_inset space ~
37874 \begin_inset space ~
37878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37880 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37884 ) or in the preferences (menu
37886 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37887 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37889 \begin_inset space ~
37892 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37894 \begin_inset space ~
37897 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37899 \begin_inset space ~
37903 \begin_inset space ~
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37915 reference "sec:File-Formats"
37922 \begin_layout Subsection
37923 Update Master Document
37926 \begin_layout Standard
37927 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
37929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37943 \begin_inset space ~
37948 manual for more information on this topic).
37949 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
37950 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
37953 \begin_layout Standard
37954 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
37955 in the document settings (menu
37957 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37958 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37959 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
37961 \begin_inset space ~
37965 \begin_inset space ~
37971 \begin_inset space ~
37975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37977 reference "sec:Doc-Output"
37981 ) or in the preferences (menu
37983 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37984 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37986 \begin_inset space ~
37989 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
37991 \begin_inset space ~
37994 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
37996 \begin_inset space ~
38000 \begin_inset space ~
38006 \begin_inset space ~
38010 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38012 reference "sec:File-Formats"
38019 \begin_layout Subsection
38021 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38023 name "subsec:Compressed"
38030 \begin_layout Standard
38031 Un/compresses the current document.
38032 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
38033 compression (see the
38035 Additional Features
38037 manual for details).
38040 \begin_layout Subsection
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
38048 \begin_layout Subsection
38052 \begin_layout Standard
38053 The document settings are described in appendix
38054 \begin_inset space ~
38058 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38060 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
38067 \begin_layout Section
38069 \begin_inset Index idx
38072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38081 \begin_layout Subsection
38085 \begin_layout Standard
38086 Spell checking is explained in section
38087 \begin_inset space ~
38091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38093 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
38100 \begin_layout Subsection
38104 \begin_layout Standard
38105 The thesaurus is described in section
38106 \begin_inset space ~
38110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38112 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
38119 \begin_layout Subsection
38121 \begin_inset Index idx
38124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38131 \begin_inset Index idx
38134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38143 \begin_layout Standard
38144 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
38145 the highlighted document part.
38148 \begin_layout Subsection
38154 \begin_inset Index idx
38157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38158 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38167 \begin_layout Standard
38168 Generates with the help of the program
38170 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
38173 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
38174 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
38175 This feature is not available on Windows.
38178 \begin_layout Subsection
38184 \begin_inset Index idx
38187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38197 \begin_layout Standard
38198 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
38203 \begin_inset space ~
38208 to see the full filename paths.
38211 \begin_layout Subsection
38213 \begin_inset Index idx
38216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38225 \begin_layout Standard
38226 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
38227 files as described in section
38228 \begin_inset space ~
38232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38234 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
38241 \begin_layout Subsection
38243 \begin_inset Index idx
38246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38259 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38277 \begin_inset Index idx
38280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38281 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
38290 \begin_layout Standard
38291 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
38292 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
38293 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
38294 -packages and programs it needs; see
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38302 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
38309 \begin_layout Subsection
38313 \begin_layout Standard
38318 dialog as described in detail in appendix
38319 \begin_inset space ~
38323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38325 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
38332 \begin_layout Section
38334 \begin_inset Index idx
38337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38346 \begin_layout Standard
38347 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
38348 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
38350 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
38354 \begin_layout Standard
38358 \begin_inset space ~
38363 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
38364 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38365 packages and classes found
38366 by \SpecialChar LyX
38368 \begin_inset space ~
38372 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38374 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
38381 \begin_layout Standard
38385 \begin_inset space ~
38390 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
38395 \begin_layout Section
38397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38399 name "sec:Toolbars"
38406 \begin_layout Standard
38407 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
38408 \begin_inset space ~
38412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38414 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
38421 \begin_layout Standard
38422 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
38423 This is described in the
38425 Additional Features
38430 \begin_layout Subsection
38432 \begin_inset Index idx
38435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38444 \begin_layout Standard
38445 \begin_inset Graphics
38446 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
38454 \begin_layout Standard
38455 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38461 \begin_layout Standard
38462 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
38467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38479 \begin_inset Note Note
38482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38483 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
38488 manual for more information.
38496 \begin_layout Standard
38497 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
38503 \begin_layout Standard
38504 \begin_inset Tabular
38505 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
38506 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38507 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38508 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
38510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38514 \begin_inset Graphics
38515 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
38525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38529 pull-down box for the environments
38542 \begin_layout Standard
38543 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
38549 \begin_layout Standard
38551 \begin_inset Tabular
38552 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
38553 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
38554 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38555 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
38556 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38579 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38586 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38609 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38639 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
38646 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38655 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38669 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38676 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38685 arg "spelling-continuously"
38693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38697 Spellcheck continuously
38703 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38726 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38733 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38756 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38786 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38816 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38823 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38846 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38862 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
38870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38876 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38878 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38882 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38886 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38895 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38902 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38916 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38918 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38922 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38935 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38944 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
38952 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38958 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
38959 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
38966 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
38967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
38986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38987 Emphasize text, function of the
38989 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38991 \begin_inset space ~
38994 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39003 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39024 Set text to noun style, function of the
39026 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39031 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39040 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39049 arg "textstyle-apply"
39057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39061 Format text using the current settings in the
39063 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39065 \begin_inset space ~
39068 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
39077 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39100 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39101 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39103 \begin_inset space ~
39112 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39121 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
39129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39135 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39142 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39149 arg "tabular-insert"
39157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39163 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39170 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39179 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
39187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39191 Toggle outline window on/off,
39193 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
39200 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39209 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
39217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39221 Toggle math toolbar on/off
39227 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39236 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
39244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39248 Toggle table toolbar on/off
39261 \begin_layout Subsection
39263 \begin_inset Index idx
39266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39275 \begin_layout Standard
39276 \begin_inset Graphics
39277 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
39285 \begin_layout Standard
39286 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39292 \begin_layout Standard
39293 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
39297 \begin_layout Standard
39298 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39304 \begin_layout Standard
39305 \begin_inset Tabular
39306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
39307 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39308 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39309 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39310 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39337 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39346 arg "layout Enumerate"
39354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39373 arg "layout Itemize"
39381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39391 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39418 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39427 arg "layout Description"
39435 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39445 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39454 arg "depth-increment"
39462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39468 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39470 \begin_inset space ~
39474 \begin_inset space ~
39483 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39492 arg "depth-decrement"
39500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39506 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
39508 \begin_inset space ~
39512 \begin_inset space ~
39521 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39530 arg "float-insert figure"
39538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39544 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39545 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39561 arg "float-insert table"
39569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39575 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39576 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
39583 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39606 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39613 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39622 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
39630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39636 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39643 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39652 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
39660 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39666 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39696 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39698 \begin_inset space ~
39707 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39716 arg "nomencl-insert"
39724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39730 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39732 \begin_inset space ~
39741 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39750 arg "footnote-insert"
39758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39764 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39771 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39780 arg "marginalnote-insert"
39788 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39794 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39796 \begin_inset space ~
39805 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39806 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39828 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39829 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
39831 \begin_inset space ~
39840 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39841 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39849 arg "box-insert Frameless"
39857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39863 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39870 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39900 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39923 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39925 \begin_inset space ~
39934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39943 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
39951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39957 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39958 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
39965 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39974 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
39982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
39989 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
39991 \begin_inset space ~
40000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40009 arg "dialog-show character"
40017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40023 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40028 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
40035 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40044 arg "layout-paragraph"
40052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40058 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40060 \begin_inset space ~
40069 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40078 arg "thesaurus-entry"
40086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40092 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40106 \begin_layout Subsection
40107 View/Update Toolbar
40108 \begin_inset Index idx
40111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40112 Toolbar ! View / Update
40120 \begin_layout Standard
40121 \begin_inset Graphics
40122 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
40129 \begin_layout Standard
40130 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40136 \begin_layout Standard
40137 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40141 \begin_layout Standard
40142 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40148 \begin_layout Standard
40149 \begin_inset Tabular
40150 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
40151 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40152 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40153 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40154 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40171 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40177 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40184 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40193 arg "buffer-update"
40201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40207 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40214 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40223 arg "master-buffer-view"
40231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40237 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40239 \begin_inset space ~
40248 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40257 arg "master-buffer-update"
40265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40273 \begin_inset space ~
40277 \begin_inset space ~
40286 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40295 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
40303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40309 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40310 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40311 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40312 Synchronize with Output
40318 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40341 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40342 View (Other Formats)
40348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40355 arg "update-others"
40363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40370 Update (Other Formats)
40383 \begin_layout Standard
40384 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
40388 \begin_layout Subsection
40392 \begin_layout Standard
40393 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
40394 \begin_inset space ~
40398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40400 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40404 , the table toolbar
40405 \begin_inset Index idx
40408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40417 \begin_inset space ~
40422 manual and the math macro toolbar
40423 \begin_inset Index idx
40426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40439 \begin_layout Chapter
40440 The Document Settings
40441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40443 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40448 \begin_inset Index idx
40451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40452 Document ! Settings
40460 \begin_layout Standard
40464 \begin_inset space ~
40469 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
40470 is called with the menu
40472 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40476 You can save your document settings as default with the
40478 Save as Document Defaults
40480 button in any dialog.
40481 This will create a template named
40485 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
40486 when you create a new document without
40490 \begin_layout Standard
40495 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
40496 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
40499 \begin_layout Standard
40500 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
40501 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
40502 to find the one you are looking for.
40503 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
40504 the submenus of the dialog.
40506 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40510 \begin_inset space \space{}
40514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40521 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
40522 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
40523 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
40526 \begin_layout Section
40530 \begin_layout Standard
40531 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
40533 Document classes are described in section
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40540 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
40548 \begin_layout Standard
40552 \begin_inset space ~
40557 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
40562 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
40563 as a layout for a document class.
40564 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
40566 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
40575 \begin_layout Standard
40576 Some classes use special class options by default.
40577 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
40581 and you can decide to use them or not.
40582 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
40583 recommended you leave them untouched.
40588 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40589 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
40594 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40596 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
40601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40602 When you want to use one of the following drivers
40603 \begin_inset Newline newline
40608 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
40611 \begin_inset Newline newline
40614 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40615 distribution, see section
40620 \begin_inset CommandInset href
40622 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
40634 \begin_layout Standard
40639 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
40640 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
40641 in the background if the child document
40642 is opened without its master.
40643 This way child documents are always compilable.
40644 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
40651 \begin_inset space ~
40659 \begin_layout Standard
40660 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40671 \begin_inset Index idx
40674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40676 -packages ! prettyref
40682 \begin_inset Index idx
40685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40687 -packages ! refstyle
40692 for cross-references, see section
40693 \begin_inset space ~
40697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40699 reference "sec:Cross-References"
40706 \begin_layout Section
40710 \begin_layout Standard
40711 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
40712 Please refer to the section
40715 \begin_inset space ~
40723 \begin_inset space ~
40728 manual for details.
40731 \begin_layout Section
40735 \begin_layout Standard
40736 Modules are explained in section
40737 \begin_inset space ~
40741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40743 reference "subsec:Modules"
40750 \begin_layout Section
40754 \begin_layout Standard
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40762 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
40769 \begin_layout Section
40773 \begin_layout Standard
40774 The document font settings are described in section
40775 \begin_inset space ~
40779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40781 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
40788 \begin_layout Section
40792 \begin_layout Standard
40793 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
40805 \begin_inset space ~
40810 and whether it should be a
40813 \begin_inset space ~
40818 can also be specified here.
40821 \begin_layout Standard
40822 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
40823 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
40824 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
40826 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
40829 \begin_layout Standard
40832 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
40835 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
40836 justifies the text on screen.
40837 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
40841 \begin_layout Section
40845 \begin_layout Standard
40846 This dialog is described in sections
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40853 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
40858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40860 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
40867 \begin_layout Section
40871 \begin_layout Standard
40872 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40879 reference "subsec:Margins"
40886 \begin_layout Section
40888 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40890 name "sec:Language-encodings"
40895 \begin_inset Index idx
40898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40899 Language ! Encoding
40907 \begin_layout Standard
40908 The document language and quote styles are set here.
40909 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
40910 (the \SpecialChar LyX
40912 is always encoded in utf8).
40913 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
40914 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
40915 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
40916 -command is not known for
40917 a particular character).
40920 \begin_layout Standard
40921 If you use the option
40926 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
40927 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
40928 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40930 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
40931 exactly one encoding.
40932 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
40935 \begin_layout Standard
40937 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
40938 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
40939 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40940 installation supports Unicode), choose
40941 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
40942 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40943 is quite incomplete, so
40944 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
40949 (when \SpecialChar LyX
40950 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40951 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
40952 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
40953 -commands is not used, because all
40954 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
40955 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
40956 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40957 , two new alternative engines
40958 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
40960 Both engines support Unicode natively.
40962 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
40965 \begin_inset space ~
40973 \begin_inset space ~
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40987 \begin_inset space ~
40991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40993 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40998 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
41002 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
41005 \begin_layout Standard
41009 \begin_inset space ~
41014 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41015 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
41017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41025 The possible settings are:
41028 \begin_layout Description
41029 Default uses the language package that is selected in
41031 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41032 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
41036 \begin_inset space ~
41040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41042 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
41049 \begin_layout Description
41050 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
41051 format you will use.
41052 In many cases this will be
41057 \begin_inset Index idx
41060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41068 If the newer package
41073 \begin_inset Index idx
41076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41078 -packages ! polyglossia
41083 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41084 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41085 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
41087 this package will be used instead of
41094 \begin_layout Description
41096 \begin_inset space ~
41107 would be more appropriate.
41110 \begin_layout Description
41111 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
41112 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
41116 (for German texts), type in
41119 \begin_inset Newline newline
41124 usepackage{ngerman}
41127 \begin_layout Description
41128 None will not use a language package.
41129 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
41132 \begin_layout Standard
41133 Here is a list with the important encodings:
41136 \begin_layout Description
41138 \begin_inset space ~
41142 \begin_inset space ~
41146 \begin_inset space ~
41153 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41159 \begin_inset Index idx
41162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41164 -packages ! inputenc
41170 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
41171 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
41172 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
41176 \begin_layout Description
41177 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
41179 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
41180 commands, which may result in a big
41181 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
41182 -commands are needed.
41185 \begin_layout Description
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41194 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
41197 \begin_layout Description
41199 \begin_inset space ~
41203 \begin_inset space ~
41206 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
41209 \begin_layout Description
41211 \begin_inset space ~
41214 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
41217 \begin_layout Description
41219 \begin_inset space ~
41223 \begin_inset space ~
41226 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
41227 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
41230 \begin_layout Description
41232 \begin_inset space ~
41236 \begin_inset space ~
41239 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
41243 \begin_layout Description
41245 \begin_inset space ~
41249 \begin_inset space ~
41252 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
41253 ISO-8859-13 encoding
41256 \begin_layout Description
41258 \begin_inset space ~
41262 \begin_inset space ~
41266 \begin_inset space ~
41269 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
41270 \begin_inset space ~
41276 \begin_layout Description
41278 \begin_inset space ~
41282 \begin_inset space ~
41286 \begin_inset space ~
41289 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
41290 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
41293 \begin_layout Description
41295 \begin_inset space ~
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41302 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
41303 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
41304 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41305 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
41306 \begin_inset space ~
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41316 \begin_layout Description
41318 \begin_inset space ~
41322 \begin_inset space ~
41325 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
41326 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
41327 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
41329 should try to use the encoding Unicode
41330 \begin_inset space ~
41334 \begin_inset space ~
41340 \begin_layout Description
41342 \begin_inset space ~
41346 \begin_inset space ~
41349 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
41352 \begin_layout Description
41354 \begin_inset space ~
41358 \begin_inset space ~
41361 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
41364 \begin_layout Description
41366 \begin_inset space ~
41370 \begin_inset space ~
41373 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
41376 \begin_layout Description
41378 \begin_inset space ~
41381 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
41384 \begin_layout Description
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41389 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
41392 \begin_layout Description
41394 \begin_inset space ~
41398 \begin_inset space ~
41401 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
41404 \begin_layout Description
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41410 \begin_inset space ~
41416 \begin_layout Description
41418 \begin_inset space ~
41422 \begin_inset space ~
41425 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
41428 \begin_layout Description
41430 \begin_inset space ~
41434 \begin_inset space ~
41440 \begin_layout Description
41442 \begin_inset space ~
41446 \begin_inset space ~
41449 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41455 \begin_inset Index idx
41458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41465 , when using this, set the document language to
41470 \begin_layout Description
41472 \begin_inset space ~
41476 \begin_inset space ~
41479 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41484 , when using this, set the document language to
41487 \begin_inset space ~
41493 \begin_layout Description
41495 \begin_inset space ~
41499 \begin_inset space ~
41502 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41508 \begin_inset Index idx
41511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41513 -packages ! japanese
41518 , when using this, set the document language to
41523 \begin_layout Description
41525 \begin_inset space ~
41529 \begin_inset space ~
41532 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41537 , when using this, set the document language to
41542 \begin_layout Description
41544 \begin_inset space ~
41548 \begin_inset space ~
41551 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41556 , when using this, set the document language to
41561 \begin_layout Description
41563 \begin_inset space ~
41566 (EUC-KR) for Korean
41569 \begin_layout Description
41571 \begin_inset space ~
41575 \begin_inset space ~
41579 \begin_inset space ~
41582 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
41585 \begin_layout Description
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41591 \begin_inset space ~
41595 \begin_inset space ~
41598 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
41599 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
41600 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
41603 \begin_layout Description
41605 \begin_inset space ~
41609 \begin_inset space ~
41615 \begin_layout Description
41617 \begin_inset space ~
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41624 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
41625 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
41628 \begin_layout Description
41630 \begin_inset space ~
41634 \begin_inset space ~
41637 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41643 \begin_inset Index idx
41646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41653 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
41656 \begin_layout Description
41658 \begin_inset space ~
41666 \begin_inset space ~
41669 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
41676 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41679 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41686 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
41687 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41689 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
41692 \begin_layout Description
41694 \begin_inset space ~
41698 \begin_inset space ~
41701 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41707 \begin_inset Index idx
41710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41717 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
41720 \begin_layout Description
41722 \begin_inset space ~
41725 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41731 \begin_inset Index idx
41734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41736 -packages ! inputenc
41742 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
41746 \begin_layout Description
41748 \begin_inset space ~
41752 \begin_inset space ~
41756 \begin_inset space ~
41759 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
41760 \begin_inset space ~
41766 \begin_layout Description
41768 \begin_inset space ~
41772 \begin_inset space ~
41776 \begin_inset space ~
41779 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
41780 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
41781 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
41785 \begin_layout Description
41787 \begin_inset space ~
41791 \begin_inset space ~
41795 \begin_inset space ~
41798 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
41799 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
41802 \begin_layout Section
41804 \begin_inset Index idx
41807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41814 \begin_inset Index idx
41817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41824 \begin_inset Index idx
41827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41828 Color ! Shaded boxes
41834 \begin_inset Index idx
41837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41838 Color ! Greyed-out notes
41846 \begin_layout Standard
41847 Here you can alter the font color for the
41851 (default: black), for
41854 \begin_inset space ~
41859 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
41863 (default: white) and for
41866 \begin_inset space ~
41876 sets the color back to the default.
41879 \begin_layout Standard
41880 Clicking any button showing
41888 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
41889 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
41890 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
41891 later more quickly.
41894 \begin_layout Standard
41895 Note, if you change the
41898 \begin_inset space ~
41903 font color and use the option
41906 \begin_inset space ~
41911 in the document settings under
41914 \begin_inset space ~
41919 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
41920 \begin_inset space ~
41924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41926 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
41933 \begin_layout Standard
41934 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
41940 \begin_layout Standard
41944 \begin_inset space ~
41953 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
41956 \begin_inset space ~
41959 Code after a forced page break:
41962 \begin_layout Itemize
41963 For the page color:
41964 \begin_inset Newline newline
41971 pagecolor{color name}
41974 \begin_layout Itemize
41975 For the text color:
41976 \begin_inset Newline newline
41986 \begin_layout Standard
41987 You are restricted to one of
42023 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
42030 \begin_inset space ~
42036 \begin_inset Newline newline
42039 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
42040 names to refer to them:
42043 \begin_layout Itemize
42049 \begin_inset Newline newline
42054 page_backgroundcolor
42057 \begin_layout Itemize
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42067 \begin_inset Newline newline
42075 \begin_layout Itemize
42079 \begin_inset space ~
42085 \begin_inset Newline newline
42093 \begin_layout Itemize
42097 \begin_inset space ~
42103 \begin_inset Newline newline
42111 \begin_layout Standard
42112 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
42115 \begin_inset space ~
42123 \begin_inset space ~
42131 \begin_layout Section
42135 \begin_layout Standard
42136 Here you can adjust the
42140 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
42144 as described in section
42145 \begin_inset space ~
42149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42151 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42158 \begin_layout Section
42162 \begin_layout Standard
42163 Here you can specify if a citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42169 \begin_inset Index idx
42172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42184 \begin_inset Index idx
42187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42189 -packages ! jurabib
42197 Sectioned bibliography
42199 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42205 \begin_inset Index idx
42208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42210 -packages ! bibtopic
42215 and you can select a
42219 for the generation of the bibliography.
42220 For a further description see section
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42227 reference "sec:Bibliography"
42234 \begin_layout Section
42238 \begin_layout Standard
42239 Here you can define the
42243 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
42245 \begin_inset space ~
42249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42251 reference "sec:Index"
42258 \begin_layout Section
42262 \begin_layout Standard
42263 The PDF properties are explained in section
42264 \begin_inset space ~
42268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42270 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
42277 \begin_layout Section
42281 \begin_layout Standard
42282 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
42283 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42289 \begin_inset Index idx
42292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42294 -packages ! amsmath
42304 \begin_inset Index idx
42307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42309 -packages ! amssymb
42319 \begin_inset Index idx
42322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42334 \begin_inset Index idx
42337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42349 \begin_inset Index idx
42352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42354 -packages ! mathdots
42364 \begin_inset Index idx
42367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42369 -packages ! mathtools
42379 \begin_inset Index idx
42382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42394 \begin_inset Index idx
42397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42399 -packages ! stackrel
42409 \begin_inset Index idx
42412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42414 -packages ! stmaryrd
42424 \begin_inset Index idx
42427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42429 -packages ! undertilde
42434 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
42437 \begin_layout Description
42438 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42439 -errors in formulas,
42440 ensure that you have this enabled.
42443 \begin_layout Description
42444 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
42445 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
42446 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
42450 \begin_layout Description
42451 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
42454 \begin_inset space ~
42466 \begin_layout Description
42467 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
42470 \begin_inset space ~
42482 \begin_layout Description
42483 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
42494 \begin_layout Description
42495 mathtools is used for the math commands
42531 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
42538 \begin_layout Description
42539 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
42541 Chemical Symbols and Equations
42550 \begin_layout Description
42551 stackrel is used for the math command
42568 \begin_layout Description
42569 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
42572 \begin_layout Description
42573 undertilde is used for the math command
42581 Accents for one Character
42590 \begin_layout Section
42594 \begin_layout Standard
42595 The float placement options are described in the section
42598 \begin_inset space ~
42606 \begin_inset space ~
42614 \begin_layout Section
42618 \begin_layout Standard
42619 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
42621 Program Code Listings
42626 \begin_inset space ~
42634 \begin_layout Section
42638 \begin_layout Standard
42639 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
42647 set to be used and set the
42652 The itemize environment is described in section
42653 \begin_inset space ~
42657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42659 reference "sec:Itemize"
42666 \begin_layout Standard
42667 You can furthermore specify a
42670 \begin_inset space ~
42675 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42676 command of the desired character.
42677 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
42684 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
42686 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42690 \begin_inset space \space{}
42694 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
42704 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
42705 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
42708 \begin_layout Standard
42709 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42717 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42718 -packages in the preamble (menu
42721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42722 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42725 \begin_inset space ~
42731 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
42735 usepackage{textcomp}
42738 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
42742 usepackage{amssymb}
42752 \begin_layout Section
42756 \begin_layout Standard
42757 Branches are described in section
42758 \begin_inset space ~
42762 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42764 reference "sec:Branches"
42771 \begin_layout Section
42773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42775 name "sec:Doc-Output"
42782 \begin_layout Standard
42783 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
42786 \begin_layout Description
42788 \begin_inset space ~
42792 \begin_inset space ~
42795 Format: The format that is used when you enter
42796 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42800 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42808 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42812 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42815 View Master Document
42816 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42823 Update Master Document
42824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42831 menu or the toolbar.
42832 The default is set in
42834 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42835 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
42837 \begin_inset space ~
42840 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
42844 \begin_inset space ~
42848 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42850 reference "sec:File-Formats"
42857 \begin_layout Description
42859 \begin_inset space ~
42863 \begin_inset space ~
42866 Output settings for the menu
42868 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
42870 \begin_inset space ~
42876 For a detailed description see section
42878 Reverse DVI/PDF search
42883 \begin_inset space ~
42891 \begin_layout Description
42893 \begin_inset space ~
42897 \begin_inset space ~
42900 Options offers settings for the export format
42908 \begin_inset space ~
42913 will assure that the output follows exactly version
42914 \begin_inset space ~
42917 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
42921 \begin_inset space ~
42926 settings are described in detail in section
42928 Math Output in XHTML
42933 \begin_inset space ~
42942 \begin_inset space ~
42946 \begin_inset space ~
42951 is used for the size of equations in the output.
42954 \begin_layout Section
42962 \begin_layout Standard
42963 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
42965 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
42967 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42969 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
42973 \begin_layout Standard
42974 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42975 -syntax is given in section
42976 \begin_inset space ~
42980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42982 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
42989 \begin_layout Chapter
42995 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42997 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
43002 \begin_inset Index idx
43005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43014 \begin_layout Standard
43015 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
43017 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43021 It has the following submenus.
43024 \begin_layout Section
43028 \begin_layout Subsection
43032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43033 User Interface File
43034 \begin_inset Index idx
43037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43038 Customization ! of toolbars
43044 \begin_inset Index idx
43047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43048 Customization ! of menus
43056 \begin_layout Standard
43057 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
43058 interface (ui) file.
43059 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
43067 \begin_layout Description
43072 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
43075 \begin_layout Description
43082 the menu entries in popup context menus
43085 \begin_layout Description
43090 specifies the toolbar buttons
43093 \begin_layout Standard
43094 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
43095 and edit the entries.
43098 \begin_layout Standard
43099 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
43111 entries must be finished with an explicit
43136 and in the case of the
43137 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43141 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43149 The syntax for the entries is:
43152 \begin_layout Standard
43153 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43167 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43182 \begin_layout Standard
43184 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43187 All the \SpecialChar LyX
43188 -functions are listed in the menu
43190 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
43192 \begin_inset space ~
43200 \begin_layout Standard
43201 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
43207 \begin_layout Standard
43208 For example, assuming you use the menu
43210 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
43213 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
43217 \begin_layout Standard
43218 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43224 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43228 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43242 \begin_layout Standard
43244 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
43248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43259 to have the sixth bookmark.
43262 \begin_layout Standard
43266 \begin_inset space ~
43271 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
43272 's toolbar buttons.
43273 The currently available icon sets are compared in
43274 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43277 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
43284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43288 \begin_layout Standard
43291 Enable tool tips in main work area
43293 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
43297 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43306 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
43307 should display in the menu
43309 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
43311 \begin_inset space ~
43319 \begin_layout Subsection
43323 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43327 \begin_layout Standard
43330 Restore window layouts and geometries
43333 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
43334 the last \SpecialChar LyX
43338 \begin_layout Standard
43341 Restore cursor positions
43343 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
43347 \begin_layout Standard
43350 Load opened files from last session
43352 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
43356 \begin_layout Standard
43359 Clear all session information
43361 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
43362 sessions (cursor positions, names
43363 of last opened documents, etc.).
43366 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43368 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43370 name "subsec:Backup documents"
43375 \begin_inset Index idx
43378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43387 \begin_layout Standard
43390 Backup original documents when saving
43392 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
43393 it was saved the last time.
43394 It is stored in the
43397 \begin_inset space ~
43403 \begin_inset space ~
43407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43409 reference "sec:Paths"
43413 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
43416 \begin_inset space ~
43422 The backup file has the file extension
43423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43437 \begin_layout Standard
43440 Backup documents, every
43442 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
43445 \begin_layout Standard
43448 Save documents compressed by default
43450 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
43451 \begin_inset space ~
43455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43457 reference "subsec:Compressed"
43462 This applies to newly created documents only.
43463 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
43466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43467 Windows & work area
43470 \begin_layout Standard
43473 Open documents in tabs
43475 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
43479 \begin_layout Standard
43484 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
43489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43491 \begin_inset space ~
43495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43497 reference "sec:Paths"
43501 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
43508 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
43509 documents will be opened in the same running instance
43510 of \SpecialChar LyX
43512 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
43513 instance is created for each file.
43516 \begin_layout Standard
43519 Single close-tab button
43521 is checked, there will only be one close button (
43531 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
43532 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
43535 \begin_layout Standard
43536 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43544 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
43545 before the change takes effect.
43553 \begin_layout Standard
43558 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
43560 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
43562 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
43566 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
43567 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
43568 and only want to close the view in once instance.
43571 \begin_layout Subsection
43573 \begin_inset Index idx
43576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43585 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
43592 \begin_layout Standard
43593 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
43597 \begin_layout Standard
43598 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
43601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43606 This section only deals with the fonts
43610 the \SpecialChar LyX
43612 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
43615 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43616 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
43627 \begin_layout Standard
43628 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
43645 (depends on the system) as its
43648 \begin_inset space ~
43664 \begin_layout Standard
43665 You can change the font size with the
43672 \begin_layout Standard
43677 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
43679 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43682 points have the size of 1
43683 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43687 \begin_inset space ~
43691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43693 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
43698 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
43699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43703 The sizes are explained in detail in section
43704 \begin_inset space ~
43708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43710 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
43717 \begin_layout Standard
43720 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
43722 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
43723 needs to redraw the screen less often.
43724 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
43725 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
43726 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
43728 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
43729 \begin_inset space ~
43735 \begin_layout Subsection
43737 \begin_inset Index idx
43740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43741 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
43748 \begin_inset Index idx
43751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43760 \begin_layout Standard
43761 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
43762 by choosing an item in the
43763 list and selecting the
43770 \begin_layout Standard
43771 By checking the option
43775 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
43778 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
43779 \begin_inset space ~
43783 \begin_inset space ~
43788 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
43791 \begin_layout Subsection
43793 \begin_inset Index idx
43796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43805 \begin_layout Standard
43806 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
43810 \begin_layout Standard
43815 enables previewing snippets of your document.
43816 This feature is described in section
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43823 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43830 \begin_layout Standard
43831 Checking the option
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43842 \begin_inset space ~
43847 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
43850 \begin_layout Section
43852 \begin_inset Index idx
43855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43864 \begin_layout Subsection
43868 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43872 \begin_layout Standard
43875 Cursor follows scrollbar
43877 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
43881 \begin_layout Standard
43882 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
43883 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
43884 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
43887 \begin_layout Standard
43890 Scroll below end of document
43892 is self-explanatory.
43895 \begin_layout Standard
43896 In \SpecialChar LyX
43897 one can jump from word to word by pressing
43904 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
43906 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
43907 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
43910 \begin_layout Standard
43913 Sort environments alphabetically
43915 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43918 \begin_layout Standard
43921 Group environments by their category
43923 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
43926 \begin_layout Standard
43931 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
43942 \begin_layout Subsubsection
43946 \begin_layout Standard
43947 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
43952 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
43953 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
43957 \begin_layout Subsection
43959 \begin_inset Index idx
43962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43969 \begin_inset Index idx
43972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43973 Settings ! Shortcuts
43981 \begin_layout Standard
43986 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
43988 Several binding files are available, among them:
43991 \begin_layout Description
43992 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
43995 \begin_layout Description
43996 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
44008 \begin_layout Description
44009 mac.bind a set of bindings for
44012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44020 \begin_layout Standard
44021 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
44026 , and binding files for special languages.
44027 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
44028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44032 \begin_inset space \space{}
44036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44044 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
44045 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
44046 will try to use the appropriate binding
44050 \begin_layout Standard
44051 Some binding files, like
44055 , only have a limited scope.
44056 When looking at the end of the file
44060 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
44063 \begin_layout Standard
44067 \begin_inset space ~
44071 \begin_inset space ~
44076 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
44077 in the selected key binding file.
44080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
44082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44084 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
44089 \begin_inset Index idx
44092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44093 Key Bindings ! Editing
44101 \begin_layout Standard
44102 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
44103 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
44104 functions and the bound shortcuts.
44105 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
44108 Show key-bindings containing
44111 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
44112 Insert there for example as keyword
44113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44120 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
44121 functions that contain
44122 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44126 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44130 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
44131 All \SpecialChar LyX
44132 functions are also listed in the file
44137 that you will find in the
44144 \begin_layout Standard
44145 For example, to add the shortcut
44153 , select the function and press the
44158 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
44159 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
44162 \begin_layout Standard
44163 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
44164 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
44166 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
44167 function names as a semicolon separated list.
44169 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
44174 \begin_layout Standard
44175 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
44178 \begin_layout Standard
44179 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
44181 The syntax of the entries is:
44184 \begin_layout Standard
44190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44209 \begin_layout Subsection
44211 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44213 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
44218 \begin_inset Index idx
44221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44228 \begin_inset Index idx
44231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44232 Settings ! Keyboard Map
44240 \begin_layout Standard
44241 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
44242 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
44243 provides keyboard maps.
44244 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
44245 is a Romanian one, you can enable
44248 \begin_inset space ~
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44257 and select the keyboard map file named
44264 \begin_layout Standard
44273 keyboard map and, if you use the
44277 bindings, you can select the first and second with
44280 arg "keymap-primary"
44286 arg "keymap-secondary"
44289 respectively or toggle between them with
44292 arg "keymap-toggle"
44298 \begin_layout Standard
44299 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44307 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
44316 \begin_layout Standard
44317 You can also specify the mouse
44319 Wheel scrolling speed
44322 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
44326 Middle mouse button pasting
44328 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
44329 inserts the content of the clipboard.
44332 \begin_layout Standard
44340 \begin_inset space ~
44344 \begin_inset space ~
44349 you can select a key for zooming.
44350 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
44353 \begin_layout Subsection
44357 \begin_layout Standard
44358 Input completion is described in section
44359 \begin_inset space ~
44363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44365 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
44372 \begin_layout Section
44374 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44381 \begin_inset Index idx
44384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44391 \begin_inset Index idx
44394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44403 \begin_layout Standard
44404 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
44405 are normally determined during
44407 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
44410 \begin_layout Description
44412 \begin_inset space ~
44415 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
44416 's working directory.
44417 It is the default when you
44428 \begin_inset space ~
44436 \begin_layout Description
44438 \begin_inset space ~
44441 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
44443 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44445 \begin_inset space ~
44449 \begin_inset space ~
44457 \begin_layout Description
44459 \begin_inset space ~
44462 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
44468 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
44472 \begin_inset Newline newline
44476 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44488 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
44489 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
44497 \begin_layout Description
44499 \begin_inset space ~
44503 \begin_inset Index idx
44506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44512 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
44513 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
44514 \begin_inset space ~
44518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44520 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44528 will be used to save the backups.
44529 \begin_inset Newline newline
44532 Backup files have the ending
44533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44543 \begin_layout Description
44545 \begin_inset space ~
44548 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
44549 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
44551 \begin_inset Newline newline
44558 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44564 You can edit this file with the program
44573 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
44574 in its preferences under
44577 \begin_inset space ~
44583 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
44588 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
44590 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
44591 in your \SpecialChar LyX
44597 and \SpecialChar LyX
44598 need to be running the same time.
44599 \begin_inset Newline newline
44602 The pipe is also used for the
44606 feature, see section
44607 \begin_inset space ~
44611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44613 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
44618 \begin_inset Newline newline
44621 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
44622 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
44623 \begin_inset Newline newline
44639 \begin_layout Description
44641 \begin_inset space ~
44644 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
44647 \begin_layout Description
44649 \begin_inset space ~
44652 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
44653 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
44654 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
44657 \begin_layout Description
44659 \begin_inset space ~
44662 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
44668 You only need to specify it if you are using
44672 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
44674 For \SpecialChar LyX
44679 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
44683 \begin_layout Description
44685 \begin_inset space ~
44688 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
44689 When \SpecialChar LyX
44690 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
44691 to find it on the system.
44692 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
44694 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
44696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44703 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
44704 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
44707 \begin_layout Description
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44712 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
44713 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
44714 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
44715 code or in the document
44717 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
44719 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
44720 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
44721 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
44722 scanned for the input files.
44723 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
44724 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
44726 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
44727 compilation may fail for some documents.
44730 \begin_layout Section
44734 \begin_layout Standard
44735 Here you can insert your
44744 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
44746 \begin_inset space ~
44750 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44752 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44756 , to mark changes you make as yours.
44759 \begin_layout Section
44761 \begin_inset Index idx
44764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 Language ! Settings
44771 \begin_inset Index idx
44774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44775 Settings ! Language
44783 \begin_layout Subsection
44785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44787 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
44794 \begin_layout Description
44796 \begin_inset space ~
44800 \begin_inset space ~
44803 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
44805 You can find its actual translation status here:
44806 \begin_inset CommandInset href
44808 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
44815 \begin_layout Description
44817 \begin_inset space ~
44820 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
44821 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
44822 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
44823 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
44824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44840 The most widespread language package is
44845 \begin_inset Index idx
44848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44855 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
44857 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44858 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44859 come with the alternative
44865 \begin_inset Index idx
44868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44870 -packages ! polyglossia
44875 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
44876 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
44882 The available selections are described in section
44883 \begin_inset space ~
44887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44889 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
44896 \begin_layout Description
44898 \begin_inset space ~
44901 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44902 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
44903 you can here specify the command to start the package.
44904 An example is the start command
44910 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
44912 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
44916 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
44931 selectlanguage{$$lang}
44936 \begin_layout Description
44938 \begin_inset space ~
44946 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
44947 command toggles the package on and off.
44950 \begin_layout Description
44952 \begin_inset space ~
44956 \begin_inset space ~
44959 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
44963 \begin_layout Description
44965 \begin_inset space ~
44969 \begin_inset space ~
44972 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
44976 \begin_layout Description
44978 \begin_inset space ~
44982 \begin_inset space ~
44985 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
44986 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
44987 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
44989 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
44996 \begin_layout Description
44998 \begin_inset space ~
45001 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
45003 When this option is not set, the
45006 \begin_inset space ~
45011 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45013 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
45016 \begin_inset space ~
45024 \begin_layout Description
45026 \begin_inset space ~
45032 \begin_inset space ~
45038 When it is not set, the
45041 \begin_inset space ~
45046 is set to the end of the document.
45049 \begin_layout Description
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45055 \begin_inset space ~
45058 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
45059 language will be underlined in blue.
45062 \begin_layout Description
45064 \begin_inset space ~
45068 \begin_inset space ~
45071 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
45072 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
45075 \begin_layout Description
45077 \begin_inset space ~
45080 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
45081 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
45082 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
45083 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
45086 \begin_layout Subsection
45090 \begin_layout Standard
45091 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
45092 \begin_inset space ~
45096 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45098 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
45105 \begin_layout Section
45109 \begin_layout Subsection
45111 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45113 name "subsec:General-output"
45120 \begin_layout Description
45122 \begin_inset space ~
45125 search Commands that will be used for the menu
45127 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45129 \begin_inset space ~
45135 For a detailed description see section
45137 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45142 \begin_inset space ~
45150 \begin_layout Description
45152 \begin_inset space ~
45155 Options Options for the program
45159 that is used for the export format
45164 \begin_inset space ~
45168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45170 reference "subsec:Export"
45175 Possible options are listed in the
45180 \begin_inset Newline newline
45184 \begin_inset Flex URL
45187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45189 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
45199 \begin_layout Description
45201 \begin_inset space ~
45205 \begin_inset space ~
45208 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
45211 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45212 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
45214 \begin_inset space ~
45220 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
45223 \begin_layout Description
45225 \begin_inset space ~
45229 \begin_inset Index idx
45232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45239 \begin_inset Index idx
45242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 Settings ! Date format
45248 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
45249 \begin_inset Newline newline
45253 \begin_inset Flex URL
45256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
45264 \begin_inset Newline newline
45267 For example the format
45268 \begin_inset Newline newline
45272 \begin_inset Newline newline
45275 prints the date as day/month/year.
45278 \begin_layout Description
45280 \begin_inset space ~
45284 \begin_inset space ~
45287 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
45288 is allowed to overwrite on export.
45291 \begin_layout Subsection
45297 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45299 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
45304 \begin_inset Index idx
45307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45308 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
45317 \begin_layout Description
45319 \begin_inset space ~
45327 \begin_inset space ~
45331 \begin_inset space ~
45334 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
45339 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
45360 are used for Cyrillic.
45361 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
45362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45374 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
45376 sets up in the background.
45377 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
45380 \begin_layout Description
45382 \begin_inset space ~
45386 \begin_inset space ~
45390 \begin_inset space ~
45394 \begin_inset space ~
45397 options They only have an effect when the program
45401 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
45404 \begin_layout Standard
45405 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
45406 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
45407 manuals of the applications.
45410 \begin_layout Description
45412 \begin_inset space ~
45415 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
45416 \begin_inset space ~
45420 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45422 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
45429 \begin_layout Description
45431 \begin_inset space ~
45434 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
45435 \begin_inset space ~
45439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45441 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
45448 \begin_layout Description
45450 \begin_inset space ~
45453 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
45454 \begin_inset space ~
45458 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45460 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
45467 \begin_layout Description
45473 \begin_inset space ~
45476 command Command for the program
45478 Check\SpecialChar TeX
45481 that is described in the section
45483 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
45488 Additional Features
45493 \begin_layout Standard
45494 There are additionally the following options:
45497 \begin_layout Description
45499 \begin_inset space ~
45503 \begin_inset space ~
45507 \begin_inset space ~
45511 \begin_inset space ~
45516 \begin_inset space ~
45519 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
45520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45537 to separate folders.
45538 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
45540 \begin_inset Index idx
45543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45550 \begin_inset Index idx
45553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45562 \begin_layout Description
45564 \begin_inset space ~
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45572 \begin_inset space ~
45576 \begin_inset space ~
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45584 \begin_inset space ~
45587 changes Removes all manually set
45593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45594 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45596 \begin_inset space ~
45601 dialog when changing the document class.
45604 \begin_layout Section
45606 \begin_inset space ~
45610 \begin_inset Index idx
45613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45622 \begin_layout Subsection
45624 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45626 name "subsec:Converters"
45631 \begin_inset Index idx
45634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45643 \begin_layout Standard
45644 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
45645 from one format to another.
45646 You can modify converters or create new ones.
45647 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
45654 \begin_inset space ~
45659 field and press the
45664 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
45668 \begin_inset space ~
45673 drop-down list, modify the
45677 field and press the
45684 \begin_layout Standard
45687 Converter File Cache
45693 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
45695 Maximum Age (in days
45698 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
45699 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
45702 \begin_layout Standard
45703 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
45704 definition, is described in the section
45715 \begin_layout Subsection
45717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45719 name "sec:File-Formats"
45724 \begin_inset Index idx
45727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45734 \begin_inset Index idx
45737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45746 \begin_layout Standard
45747 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
45757 programs that should be used for certain formats.
45760 \begin_layout Standard
45761 You can also define the
45763 Default output format
45765 that is used when you use
45767 View, Update, View Master Document
45771 Update Master Document
45777 menu or the toolbar.
45780 \begin_layout Standard
45781 More about formats and their options is described in the section
45792 \begin_layout Standard
45793 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
45795 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
45796 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
45797 This is done by specifying a
45802 More about this is described in the section
45813 \begin_layout Chapter
45814 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45816 \begin_inset Index idx
45819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45828 name "chap:Units-available-in"
45835 \begin_layout Standard
45837 \begin_inset space ~
45841 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45843 reference "tab:Units"
45847 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
45848 and used in this documentation.
45851 \begin_layout Standard
45852 \begin_inset Float table
45858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45859 \begin_inset Caption Standard
45861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45877 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45885 \begin_inset Tabular
45886 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
45887 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
45888 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45889 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45890 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45892 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45901 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
45972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
45992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46064 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46096 scaled point (65536
46097 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46101 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46120 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46123 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46134 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46138 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46175 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
46179 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46212 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46248 % of original image width
46253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46375 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46388 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46419 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46459 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
46528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46530 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46534 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
46545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 \begin_layout Chapter
46566 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46568 name "chap:Credits"
46575 \begin_layout Standard
46576 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
46577 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
46580 \begin_layout Itemize
46583 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
46586 \begin_layout Itemize
46592 \begin_layout Itemize
46598 \begin_layout Itemize
46604 \begin_layout Itemize
46610 \begin_layout Itemize
46616 \begin_layout Itemize
46622 \begin_layout Itemize
46628 \begin_layout Itemize
46631 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
46634 \begin_layout Itemize
46640 \begin_layout Itemize
46646 \begin_layout Itemize
46652 \begin_layout Itemize
46658 \begin_layout Itemize
46664 \begin_layout Itemize
46670 \begin_layout Itemize
46676 \begin_layout Itemize
46682 \begin_layout Itemize
46683 The \SpecialChar LyX
46685 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
46694 \begin_layout Standard
46695 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
46698 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
46705 \begin_layout Bibliography
46706 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46707 LatexCommand bibitem
46713 The \SpecialChar LyX
46715 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46718 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
46723 \begin_inset Newline newline
46727 \begin_inset Flex URL
46730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46732 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
46740 \begin_layout Bibliography
46741 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46742 LatexCommand bibitem
46743 key "latexcompanion"
46747 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
46749 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46750 Companion Second Edition.
46753 Addison-Wesley, 2004
46756 \begin_layout Bibliography
46757 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46758 LatexCommand bibitem
46763 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
46766 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
46770 Addison-Wesley, 2003
46773 \begin_layout Bibliography
46774 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46775 LatexCommand bibitem
46783 : A Document Preparation System.
46786 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
46789 \begin_layout Bibliography
46790 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46791 LatexCommand bibitem
46800 The \SpecialChar TeX
46804 Addison-Wesley, 1984
46807 \begin_layout Bibliography
46808 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46809 LatexCommand bibitem
46814 The \SpecialChar TeX
46816 \begin_inset Newline newline
46820 \begin_inset Flex URL
46823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46825 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
46833 \begin_layout Bibliography
46834 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46835 LatexCommand bibitem
46840 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
46842 \begin_inset Newline newline
46846 \begin_inset Flex URL
46849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46851 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
46859 \begin_layout Bibliography
46860 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46861 LatexCommand bibitem
46867 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46869 name "Documentation"
46870 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
46876 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46880 \begin_inset Newline newline
46884 \begin_inset Flex URL
46887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46889 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
46897 \begin_layout Bibliography
46898 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46899 LatexCommand bibitem
46905 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46907 name "Documentation"
46908 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
46912 how to use the program
46914 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46918 \begin_inset Newline newline
46922 \begin_inset Flex URL
46925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46927 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
46935 \begin_layout Bibliography
46936 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46937 LatexCommand bibitem
46943 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46945 name "Documentation"
46946 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
46955 \begin_inset Newline newline
46959 \begin_inset Flex URL
46962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46964 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
46972 \begin_layout Bibliography
46973 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
46974 LatexCommand bibitem
46975 key "makeindex-man"
46980 \begin_inset CommandInset href
46983 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
46992 \begin_inset Newline newline
46996 \begin_inset Flex URL
46999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47001 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
47009 \begin_layout Bibliography
47010 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47011 LatexCommand bibitem
47017 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47019 name "Documentation"
47020 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
47029 \begin_inset Newline newline
47033 \begin_inset Flex URL
47036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47038 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
47046 \begin_layout Bibliography
47047 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47048 LatexCommand bibitem
47054 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47056 name "Documentation"
47057 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
47061 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
47063 \begin_inset Newline newline
47067 \begin_inset Flex URL
47070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47072 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
47080 \begin_layout Bibliography
47081 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47082 LatexCommand bibitem
47088 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47090 name "Documentation"
47091 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
47095 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47101 \begin_inset Index idx
47104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47106 -packages ! caption
47112 \begin_inset Newline newline
47116 \begin_inset Flex URL
47119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47121 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
47129 \begin_layout Bibliography
47130 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47131 LatexCommand bibitem
47137 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47139 name "Documentation"
47140 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
47144 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47150 \begin_inset Index idx
47153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47155 -packages ! enumitem
47161 \begin_inset Newline newline
47165 \begin_inset Flex URL
47168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47170 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
47178 \begin_layout Bibliography
47179 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47180 LatexCommand bibitem
47186 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47188 name "Documentation"
47189 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
47193 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47199 \begin_inset Index idx
47202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47204 -packages ! fancyhdr
47210 \begin_inset Newline newline
47214 \begin_inset Flex URL
47217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47219 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
47227 \begin_layout Bibliography
47228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47229 LatexCommand bibitem
47235 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47237 name "Documentation"
47238 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
47242 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47248 \begin_inset Index idx
47251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47253 -packages ! hyperref
47259 \begin_inset Newline newline
47263 \begin_inset Flex URL
47266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47268 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
47276 \begin_layout Bibliography
47277 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47278 LatexCommand bibitem
47284 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47286 name "Documentation"
47287 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
47291 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47297 \begin_inset Index idx
47300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47302 -packages ! nomencl
47308 \begin_inset Newline newline
47312 \begin_inset Flex URL
47315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47317 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
47325 \begin_layout Bibliography
47326 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47327 LatexCommand bibitem
47333 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47335 name "Documentation"
47336 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
47340 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47346 \begin_inset Index idx
47349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47351 -packages ! prettyref
47357 \begin_inset Newline newline
47361 \begin_inset Flex URL
47364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47366 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
47374 \begin_layout Bibliography
47375 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47376 LatexCommand bibitem
47382 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47384 name "Documentation"
47385 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
47389 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47395 \begin_inset Index idx
47398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47400 -packages ! refstyle
47406 \begin_inset Newline newline
47410 \begin_inset Flex URL
47413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47415 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
47423 \begin_layout Bibliography
47424 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47425 LatexCommand bibitem
47431 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47434 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
47438 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47440 \begin_inset Newline newline
47444 \begin_inset Flex URL
47447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47449 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
47457 \begin_layout Bibliography
47458 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47459 LatexCommand bibitem
47465 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47468 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
47472 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47474 \begin_inset Newline newline
47478 \begin_inset Flex URL
47481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47483 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
47491 \begin_layout Bibliography
47492 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47493 LatexCommand bibitem
47499 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47502 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
47506 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47507 for Cyrillic languages:
47508 \begin_inset Newline newline
47512 \begin_inset Flex URL
47515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47517 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
47525 \begin_layout Bibliography
47526 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47527 LatexCommand bibitem
47533 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47536 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
47540 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47542 \begin_inset Newline newline
47546 \begin_inset Flex URL
47549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47551 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
47559 \begin_layout Bibliography
47560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47561 LatexCommand bibitem
47567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47570 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
47574 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47576 \begin_inset Newline newline
47580 \begin_inset Flex URL
47583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47585 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
47593 \begin_layout Bibliography
47594 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47595 LatexCommand bibitem
47601 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47604 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
47608 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47610 \begin_inset Newline newline
47614 \begin_inset Flex URL
47617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47619 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
47627 \begin_layout Bibliography
47628 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47629 LatexCommand bibitem
47635 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47638 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
47642 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47644 \begin_inset Newline newline
47648 \begin_inset Flex URL
47651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47653 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
47661 \begin_layout Bibliography
47662 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47663 LatexCommand bibitem
47669 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47672 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
47676 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47678 \begin_inset Newline newline
47682 \begin_inset Flex URL
47685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47687 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
47695 \begin_layout Bibliography
47696 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47697 LatexCommand bibitem
47703 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47706 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
47710 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47712 \begin_inset Newline newline
47716 \begin_inset Flex URL
47719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47721 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
47729 \begin_layout Bibliography
47730 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47731 LatexCommand bibitem
47737 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47740 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
47744 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
47746 \begin_inset Newline newline
47750 \begin_inset Flex URL
47753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47755 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
47763 \begin_layout Bibliography
47764 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
47765 LatexCommand bibitem
47771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47774 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
47778 about new features in
47784 \begin_inset Newline newline
47788 \begin_inset Flex URL
47791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47793 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
47801 \begin_layout Standard
47802 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
47809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47836 \begin_inset Note Note
47839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47846 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
47847 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
47848 bibliography is the second one:
47856 \begin_layout Standard
47857 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
47858 LatexCommand bibtex
47859 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
47860 options "biblio/alphadin"
47867 \begin_layout Standard
47868 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47872 \begin_layout Standard
47873 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
47874 LatexCommand printnomenclature
47880 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
47881 LatexCommand printindex